{ "store": "My Wedding Company", "website": "https://mywedding.net.au", "currency": "AUD", "count": 40, "products": [ { "id": "beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box", "sku": "beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box", "title": "Beige Velvet Hexagon Double Ring Box", "slug": "beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box", "price": 29.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.03 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/main-beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two ring slots, a hexagonal shape and a detachable lid bring your chosen rings into one presentation.", "description": "A small detail with a clear job\n\nWedding rings need an agreed place before the ceremony. Without one, they can end up in separate boxes, passed between people or tucked into a pocket at the last minute. A double ring box gives you one place to present the pair and one item to include in the handover plan.\n\nThis beige velvet hexagon double ring box has two slots and a detachable lid. Its role is straightforward. It holds the chosen rings for presentation, subject to fit, and gives them a shared setting for the ceremony or photographs.\n\nChoosing a ring box is partly about appearance, but practical details matter just as much. Think about the rings themselves, who will carry them and how the lid will be handled. A short check before the day is more useful than choosing on colour alone.\n\nHow the two-slot layout works\n\nA double ring holder has space to present two rings separately within one box. You might use it for both partners' wedding bands. Another option is to place an engagement ring beside a wedding band for a photograph or gift presentation.\n\nThe important point is that two slots do not guarantee a fit for every pair of rings. A broad band takes up space differently from a narrow one. A raised stone setting also needs enough room around it and beneath the lid.\n\nIndividual slot dimensions are not specified by the maker. If your rings have unusual shapes, large settings or wide bands, confirm the fit information before ordering. Once the box arrives, place each ring gently into its intended slot. Never force a ring into place to make the display work.\n\nCheck the pair together as well as separately. Each ring should sit without pressing against the other.\n\nWhy choose beige velvet?\n\nColour helps a small accessory feel connected to the rest of a wedding. A beige ring box is worth considering if you are choosing neutral wedding accessories or want a quieter colour beside your rings.\n\nThat does not mean every beige item will match. Fabric texture, lighting and nearby colours can change how a shade appears. If a close match matters, compare the box in person with the details you already have.\n\nVelvet is the material listed for this product. Its fibre composition and the box's internal construction are not specified. Choose it for the stated material and appearance rather than assuming a particular fabric blend.\n\nFor photographs, try the box beside your actual stationery or fabric samples. This is a useful way to decide whether it belongs in the wider arrangement without buying more matching accessories.\n\nWhat the hexagonal shape adds\n\nA hexagon ring box has a six-sided outline. That simple change in shape may suit you if you prefer something different from a square jewellery box.\n\nThink about where the box will appear. It might sit beside a bouquet for a photograph, be held during the ring exchange or be placed on a table before the ceremony. The outline will be more noticeable in some views than others.\n\nYou do not need to build a whole wedding theme around it. A small geometric detail can stand on its own. If you already have several shapes and textures in your styling, keep the ring presentation simple and see how it looks with the actual items.\n\nFlowers, stationery and other display pieces are not included. The purchase is for one ring box.\n\nWorking with a detachable lid\n\nThis detachable lid ring box opens by removing the lid completely. That allows an open presentation without a hinged lid standing behind the rings.\n\nIt also means there are two separate pieces to manage. Before the ceremony, decide who will remove the lid and where it will go. A nearby surface or a handover to another adult may work, depending on your arrangements.\n\nPractise the movement while standing in the position you expect to use. Holding a box at home is different from holding it while carrying something else or waiting for a cue.\n\nDo not assume the lid has a locking closure. No transport security feature is specified. Keep the box under careful control when valuable rings are inside, and avoid tipping it to show the contents.\n\nWho this wedding ring box may suit\n\nThis design is worth considering for couples who want two rings presented together. It may also suit someone who wants an engagement ring box with a second slot for a band.\n\nFor a proposal, consider how you want the reveal to happen. A removable lid needs somewhere to go, so practise opening the box before relying on it in the moment. Check that your ring fits and that the lid clears the setting.\n\nAs a gift, the box makes sense when you know the recipient wants a wedding accessory rather than jewellery itself. Be clear that rings are not part of the pack.\n\nIf a child will take part in the ceremony, plan adult supervision. The maker's description does not establish that the box is child-safe or that it will retain rings if dropped. Responsibility for valuable jewellery should remain clear.\n\nCheck size and fit before committing\n\nThe structured dimensions field is blank in the maker's description. Do not estimate size from photographs or assume the box will fit a pocket, bag or display space.\n\nAsk for the current listed measurements if the outside size matters to your plans. For ring fit, outside measurements alone are not enough. Slot width and clearance beneath the lid can be more important.\n\nThe product weight is recorded as 0.03 kg. A separate maker display row lists 1.13 ounces. Neither figure tells you whether a particular ring setting will fit.\n\nWhen the box arrives, inspect it before putting it into use. Check the colour, lid and slots, then try your rings gently. Allowing time for this step is especially useful when you have a fixed ceremony date.\n\nPlan the ring handover\n\nA wedding ceremony ring holder works best as part of a clear plan. Choose one person to take responsibility for the rings before the ceremony and agree when that responsibility changes.\n\nTell that person how the lid comes off. Show them which ring belongs to whom and which way the box should face. Small instructions can prevent unnecessary searching during the exchange.\n\nIf the box is also being used for photographs, agree when it moves from the photographer's arrangement to the person carrying it. Avoid leaving this decision until everyone is getting ready.\n\nThe box does not replace careful handling. It is a presentation accessory, not a stated security case. Keep valuable jewellery attended and follow any advice provided by your jeweller about handling the rings.\n\nUse it in photographs without overcomplicating things\n\nA ring presentation box can give two rings a shared place in a photograph. Start with the open box and the rings, then decide whether anything else is needed.\n\nLook at the arrangement from the camera's angle. The six-sided shape and beige velvet may already provide enough detail. Adding more objects can make the rings harder to see.\n\nIf you want photographs before the ceremony, include that in the schedule. Leave time to return the rings to the person responsible for them.\n\nAfterwards, check that both rings have been removed before packing the empty box away. This simple habit is useful whenever jewellery moves between a display and its wearer.\n\nGentle care for velvet\n\nHandle the box with clean, dry hands. Keep it away from drinks, damp surfaces and products that could mark the fabric.\n\nFor light dust, use a soft, dry brush with a gentle touch. Remove all jewellery first. Avoid soaking the box or applying harsh cleaners, since a cleaning method for the full construction is not specified.\n\nStore it in a dry place away from direct sunlight. Keep the lid with the base and avoid stacking heavy items on top.\n\nIf you plan to keep it as a wedding memento, put it away clean and dry after the event. Do not treat it as waterproof storage or assume it offers the protection of a secured travel jewellery case.\n\nOrder with time to check it\n\nDelivery is Australia only. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by delivery taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than planning around a last-minute arrival.\n\nLeave time to inspect the box and check ring fit. If you are giving it as a gift, allow the recipient time to do the same.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. Return postage is paid by the customer. Keep the packaging while you decide whether the box suits your needs.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. No warranty is sold with the box.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this velvet ring box if you want a beige, six-sided presentation box with two ring slots and a removable lid. One box is included, without rings.\n\nConfirm fit, plan who will handle it and leave enough time for delivery and inspection. Those practical checks will help you decide whether this double ring box belongs in your wedding plans.", "llm_summary": "This beige velvet hexagon double ring box is a wedding accessory with two ring slots and a detachable lid. The listed material is velvet, the colour is beige and the shape is hexagonal. One box is supplied. It can present two wedding rings or an engagement ring and wedding band together, subject to fit. Rings are not included. The recorded weight is 0.03 kg, while the maker display specification lists 1.13 ounces. Structured dimensions, individual slot measurements, country of origin and internal construction are not specified by the maker. Check ring fit before the event. Handle with dry hands and clean gently. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days and tracked courier delivery taking up to seven further working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/beige-velvet-hexagon-double-ring-box.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack", "sku": "gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack", "title": "Gold Bridal Hair Combs and Pins Set, 26 Pieces", "slug": "gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack", "price": 35.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/main-gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two decorative side combs and 24 U-shaped pins give you options for placing leaf, flower and pearl-style details through your wedding hairstyle.", "description": "Start with the hairstyle, then choose the details\n\nFinding hair accessories can be harder than finding something you like in a photo. A comb may look right on its own but feel too large beside your earrings. A row of pins might suit the back of an updo, yet get lost when viewed from the front. The useful question is where you want the detail to sit.\n\nThis Gold Bridal Hair Combs and Pins 26 Pack gives you separate pieces to work with rather than a single fixed headpiece. It contains two decorative leaf side combs and 24 U-shaped pins. You can plan a focal point with a comb, place smaller accents around it, or use only a few pins.\n\nThe aim is not to fit everything into one hairstyle. It is to choose an arrangement that works with your hair, outfit and other accessories. Start with the shape of the hairstyle and let that guide the decoration.\n\nUnderstand what is in the pack\n\nThe set contains 26 pieces in total. Two are decorative leaf side combs, and the remaining 24 are U-shaped hair pins. Within the pin selection are 18 pearl-style pieces in six different sizes.\n\nThe design includes leaf and flower motifs with artificial rhinestone and pearl decorations. Gold is the listed colour. Together, those details give the set its vintage-style appearance.\n\nSome facts remain unstated. Exact dimensions, weight and base material are not specified by the maker. The six pearl-style pin sizes are described, but their measurements are not given. Do not read the piece count as a guide to size, weight or how much hair each accessory can hold.\n\nIf those details affect your decision, check the listed measurements against your planned hairstyle and outfit before ordering. Where measurements are unavailable, ask for clarification rather than guessing from an image.\n\nDecide where you want the focus\n\nThink about which part of your hairstyle will be most visible. If your hair is gathered low, you may want decoration near that shape. With a side arrangement, one of the leaf hair combs could become the main detail. These are styling ideas to test, not promises of fit.\n\nA useful starting point is one focal piece. Look at it from the front, side and back before adding pins. This makes it easier to see whether the arrangement needs more detail or already feels complete.\n\nYou can also work with individual pins alone. A few pearl-style hair pins may suit a quieter look, while mixed decorative details offer another direction. Leave space between pieces during your trial so you can judge each addition. It is easier to add one more pin than to understand a crowded arrangement.\n\nHow the combs and U-shaped pins are used\n\nSide combs are placed into a prepared hairstyle. The U-shaped hair pins allow smaller details to be positioned separately. Their role in your finished style will depend on your hair and the way it has been arranged.\n\nDo not assume decorative pieces will do all the work of securing an updo. Your stylist may use separate styling pins or other supports to build the shape first. Those extra items are not listed as part of this pack.\n\nDuring a trial, pay attention to comfort as well as appearance. Turn your head gently and check whether any piece pulls. Ask the person helping you to look for pins that sit awkwardly or comb teeth that remain visible where you do not want them.\n\nIf a piece feels uncomfortable, change its placement. There is no reason to keep an arrangement simply because it looked good in an inspiration photo.\n\nMatch the set to your outfit\n\nGold wedding hair accessories can be considered alongside your earrings, necklace and dress details. The listed colour is gold, but no precise shade reference is supplied. Avoid assuming it will be an exact match for jewellery you already own.\n\nLay your chosen accessories beside the outfit before deciding how many hair pieces to use. Look at the balance of detail. A dress with a decorated neckline may lead you towards fewer hair accents, while another outfit may leave room for a more noticeable arrangement.\n\nThe leaf and flower motifs are worth considering too. If your outfit already includes floral details, decide whether you want to repeat that idea or keep the hair decoration more restrained. There is no required combination. Your own preference matters more than using every matching element.\n\nFor the best view, check the whole outfit rather than judging the hair accessories alone.\n\nPlan for your hair type, not someone else's\n\nA product photo cannot tell you how a comb will sit in your hair. Length, texture and the planned style all affect placement. The maker does not give a minimum hair length or a guarantee for fine, thick or curly hair.\n\nFor short hair, ask whether there is enough structure for the comb or pins to sit comfortably. For fine hair, discuss how the style will be supported. With thick or curly hair, check that the decorative details remain visible where you want them.\n\nA hairdresser can help assess those questions during a trial. Bring pictures of the hairstyle you want, but remain open to moving the accessories. A small change in position may suit your own hair better than copying a reference exactly.\n\nThe best wedding updo accessories for you are the ones that work with the finished style and feel comfortable when worn.\n\nMake time for a bridal hairstyle trial\n\nA bridal hairstyle trial is a chance to test the whole arrangement, not just choose a pin position. Bring the hair accessories, your planned earrings and any veil you intend to wear. Veil compatibility is not specified, so it needs to be checked in practice.\n\nAsk to see the hairstyle from several angles. Take a few photos to help compare arrangements later. A detail that is clear from behind may barely show from the front, and that might be fine if it matches your plan.\n\nAlso discuss how the pieces will be removed. If you plan to take off a veil or change your hairstyle during the event, test that step rather than leaving it until the day.\n\nKeep a record of the final arrangement. A simple photo of the chosen comb and pins can help avoid confusion when several similar pieces are laid out together.\n\nUsing the set beyond bridal styling\n\nThe listed uses include bridesmaids, wedding guests, proms, formal events and photo shoots. That makes the design relevant beyond a bride's hairstyle, though each wearer still needs to check fit and placement.\n\nIf you are choosing bridesmaid hair accessories, consider the different hairstyles in the group. A shared gold colour does not mean everyone needs the same arrangement. One person may prefer a comb, while another may choose a few pins.\n\nThe pack count does not establish how many complete hairstyles it will provide. Decide which pieces each person needs before assuming one set will cover a group.\n\nFor wedding guest hair accessories, think about the dress code and your outfit. For a photo shoot, test how the placement looks on camera. In either case, a small selection may be enough.\n\nCare for the decorative pieces gently\n\nTreat the combs and pins as decorative accessories when handling them. Hold each piece carefully during placement and removal, and avoid pulling it through tangled hair. Take your time when removing pieces from the back of an updo.\n\nAs a general care measure, wipe with a soft, dry cloth after use. The base material is not specified, so avoid soaking the pieces or using strong cleaning products.\n\nApply hairspray and other styling products before placing the accessories where practical. This helps limit direct contact with the decorative surfaces.\n\nOnce removed, keep the pieces dry and separate them so the decorations do not catch together. Check that all the pins are accounted for before packing away your styling tools or putting clothing on top of them.\n\nOrder early and check the return conditions\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding or event date.\n\nAllow time not only for arrival but also for checking the set and planning your hairstyle. An accessory ordered close to the event leaves little room for questions or a change of plan.\n\nChange-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Keep those conditions in mind before wearing the pieces for a trial.\n\nIf an item arrives faulty or damaged, it is put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Contact us with details so the issue can be addressed.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis set offers two leaf side combs and 24 U-shaped pins, including 18 pearl-style pins in six sizes. It is a way to plan gold, vintage-style details without committing to one fixed headpiece.\n\nChoose your hairstyle first, confirm any missing measurements that matter to you, and test placement before the occasion. Use only the pieces that suit the look. A thoughtful arrangement matters more than wearing the full pack.", "llm_summary": "This gold bridal hair accessory set contains 26 pieces, comprising two decorative leaf side combs and 24 U-shaped hair pins. Eighteen pearl-style pins are supplied in six different sizes. The design includes leaf and flower motifs with artificial rhinestone and pearl decorations, described in a vintage style. Intended occasions include weddings, proms, formal events and photo shoots, with use by brides, bridesmaids and wedding guests. Exact dimensions, weight, base material and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days followed by up to seven working days by tracked courier. Unused change-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-bridal-hair-combs-and-pins-26-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow", "sku": "ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow", "title": "Ivory Lace Bridal Garter with Satin Bow", "slug": "ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow", "price": 33.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/main-ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "An elastic band stretches up to 25 inches around, with lace and a bow adding a decorative detail to your bridal outfit.", "description": "A small wedding detail worth checking early\n\nA bridal garter is a small part of an outfit, but choosing one still takes a little thought. You want the style to suit your dress, the band to fit where you plan to wear it, and enough time to check both before the wedding.\n\nThis ivory lace bridal garter with satin bow has an elastic band and rhinestone detail. It offers a decorative option for someone who wants a lace accessory beneath their outfit or as part of their wedding traditions.\n\nThe useful starting point is fit, not the one-size label. The band stretches up to 25 inches around, but a maximum stretch does not tell you how it will feel during wear. Measure first, then consider the bow, colour and care needs.\n\nWhat this garter includes\n\nThe design combines ivory lace with a satin bow and rhinestone detail. Its listed material composition is polyester. A separate fibre breakdown for each part is not provided, so the word satin should not be read as a claim that the bow is silk.\n\nThe lace gives the garter its decorative appearance, while the bow forms a focal point. Whether you want that detail seen in a photograph or kept beneath your outfit is a personal choice.\n\nA second garter is not listed. If you want one to keep and another for a garter toss, do not assume this purchase covers both. Other wedding accessories and gift packaging are also not specified.\n\nHow the elastic band works\n\nAn elastic wedding garter stretches around the thigh. Unlike a fixed-size band, it can expand, but it still needs to suit the wearer and the chosen position.\n\nFor this design, the stated maximum is 25 inches around. The relaxed circumference and recommended comfortable fit range are not given by the maker. Those missing measurements matter, particularly if you are close to the upper limit or need to know how firmly it will sit on a smaller thigh.\n\nAvoid treating the stretch figure as a target. A band that reaches a measurement may not feel comfortable there for a long period. If the fit information is not enough to make a confident choice, ask for clarification before ordering.\n\nMeasure where you plan to wear it\n\nWedding garter sizing starts with your intended wearing position. Use a flexible measuring tape around that part of your thigh, keeping it level without pulling it tightly into the skin.\n\nDo not use your dress size as a substitute. Clothing sizes do not provide a reliable thigh measurement, and moving the garter higher or lower can change the fit.\n\nCompare your measurement with the stated 25-inch maximum stretch. If your measurement is close to that limit, remember that no comfort allowance is given. If it is much smaller, the absent relaxed measurement still leaves a question about how securely the band will sit.\n\nKeep the product dimensions separate from this check. The listed 15.24 x 3.81 x 0.51 cm dimensions are not a wearing circumference.\n\nCheck it with your actual wedding outfit\n\nA garter for wedding dress wear needs to work with the outfit as a whole. A fitted skirt may show the outline of a bow, while another cut may leave more space around the thigh. Fabric and lining also affect what can be seen.\n\nDuring an outfit fitting, check the garter while standing, sitting and walking. Look at the bow area from the front and side. You are checking both comfort and appearance, rather than assuming that a small accessory will stay out of sight.\n\nPay attention to pressure, rubbing or slipping. If the band feels uncomfortable, do not rely on getting used to it on the day. An accessory should not become something you have to keep adjusting through the ceremony or reception.\n\nChoosing ivory and lace\n\nIvory wedding accessories can help repeat a colour used elsewhere in an outfit. Still, ivory is a description, not a guarantee of an exact match between different products.\n\nThink about how closely the garter needs to match your dress. If it will remain hidden, a small shade difference may not matter to you. If you plan to include it in close-up photographs with other accessories, colour coordination may deserve more attention.\n\nThe same applies to lace. Different lace designs can look quite different together. Rather than expecting an exact match, decide whether the overall look works for you. This satin bow garter has its own decorative detail, so consider that alongside any other bows or embellishments in your outfit.\n\nDecide how it fits your wedding plans\n\nYou do not need to take part in a garter tradition to wear one. You might want it as a private outfit detail, for a photograph, or as an item to keep afterwards.\n\nIf a garter toss is part of your plans, decide in advance whether you are happy to use this garter for it. No separate toss piece is listed. Buying with that distinction in mind avoids having to choose between keeping and giving away the same item later.\n\nIt is also fine to decide that a garter is not needed. The useful question is whether it adds something you want to your wedding outfit, rather than whether it appears on an accessories checklist.\n\nBuying a garter as a gift\n\nA bridal garter gift is easier to choose when the recipient has said they want one. Style preferences are personal, and fit is more specific than a one-size description may suggest.\n\nCheck whether ivory lace and a bow suit their plans. If possible, let them confirm their own measurement rather than guessing. That gives them a say in an item they may wear close to the skin.\n\nGift packaging and personalisation are not specified for this product. If presentation matters, plan it separately. Keep the original packaging and return conditions in mind before any use, since change-of-mind returns require the item to be unused and in its original packaging.\n\nCare before and after the wedding\n\nThe listed bridal garter care instruction is dry clean only. Do not treat it as machine washable or assume that a gentle hand wash is allowed.\n\nIf cleaning is needed, show the garter and its care guidance to a dry cleaner. Point out the lace, bow and rhinestone detail so they can assess the item before treatment.\n\nBefore the wedding, keep it away from jewellery, rough fastenings and other items that could catch the lace. Store it somewhere clean and dry. There is no need to add an unlisted cleaning method or treatment to your preparation.\n\nIf you plan to keep it afterwards, deal with any cleaning needs before putting it away. A wedding garter keepsake is still a textile accessory, so careful handling matters.\n\nAllow time for delivery and a fit check\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. The delivery window is only part of the planning. You also need time to inspect the garter, compare it with your outfit and resolve any questions about fit.\n\nWhen it arrives, check the item and packaging before making plans to wear it. Review the return conditions before a try-on if you may need a change-of-mind return, since the item must remain unused and in its original packaging.\n\nLeaving these checks until the wedding morning gives you fewer options if the colour or size is not what you expected.\n\nKnow your options if it is not suitable\n\nChange-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay the return postage.\n\nThat makes an early decision useful. Keep track of the delivery date, retain the packaging and assess whether the product meets your needs before using it.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. If there is a problem, contact us with the details rather than attempting a repair or cleaning treatment first.\n\nNo warranty is sold. The stated returns policy and Australian Consumer Law provisions are the relevant information to consider here.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this ivory bridal garter if you want lace, a satin bow and rhinestone detail, and the available fit information suits your needs. Check your thigh measurement against the 25-inch maximum stretch without treating that figure as a comfort guarantee.\n\nThen check how it works with your outfit and whether dry-clean-only care suits you. Order ahead, keep the packaging while you assess it, and leave yourself time to make a considered choice before the wedding.", "llm_summary": "This ivory lace bridal garter features a satin bow with rhinestone detail and an elastic band. The band stretches up to 25 inches around, and the maker describes the size as one size. A relaxed circumference and recommended fit range are not specified by the maker. Polyester is the listed material composition. Product dimensions are 15.24 x 3.81 x 0.51 cm, and the listed product weight is 11.34 g. Care is dry clean only. Brand and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days followed by up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Unused change-of-mind returns in original packaging are accepted within 14 days of delivery.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/ivory-lace-bridal-garter-with-satin-bow.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle", "sku": "ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle", "title": "Ivory Satin Flower Girl Basket with Pearl Handle", "slug": "ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle", "price": 30.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.1 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/main-ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "A satin basket with a pearl handle and bow detail gives your flower girl a small accessory to carry during the ceremony.", "description": "A flower girl basket is a small part of a wedding, but choosing one still takes a little thought. It needs to work with the outfit, suit the child's role and fit the rules of your ceremony venue. A basket that looks right in a photo may be a different size or shade from what you expected.\n\nThis ivory satin flower girl basket has a pearl handle and bow detail. The pack contains one basket, ready for you to plan around your own ceremony arrangements. Petals and flowers are not included.\n\nThe most useful checks are simple. Look at the measurements, remember that the colour is ivory rather than white, and leave enough time to inspect the basket before the wedding. Here is how to decide whether it belongs in your plans.\n\nStart with the flower girl's role\n\nBefore choosing a wedding aisle basket, decide what the flower girl will do. Will she scatter petals, carry the basket without scattering anything, or walk beside another member of the wedding party? That choice affects what you need to check.\n\nIf you plan to use petals, ask the venue about its rules first. Some venues may restrict what can be scattered or require someone to clear it away. Confirm those details directly rather than assuming a basket means petals can be used.\n\nYou can also plan a simple walk with the basket as an accessory. Think about where the child will start, who will help her get ready and where she will go once she reaches the end of the aisle. Those practical details matter more than adding extra decorations.\n\nUnderstand the size before ordering\n\nThis is a small flower girl basket. Its top diameter is 13 cm, while the bottom diameter is 9.5 cm. The body measures 8.5 cm high without the handle. Including the handle, the full height is 20.3 cm.\n\nThe overall product dimensions are listed as 13 cm deep by 13 cm wide by 20.3 cm high. These measurements give you a better guide than a styled photograph, where surrounding objects can change your sense of scale.\n\nUse a ruler or tape measure to picture that size beside the child's outfit. You could mark out a 13 cm circle on paper to understand the top width. This will not recreate the basket, but it can help you judge whether the size matches your expectations.\n\nPetal capacity is not stated. Neither is a maximum carrying weight, so avoid planning around a fixed quantity or heavy contents.\n\nChoose ivory with care\n\nThe listed colour is ivory, not white. That is worth checking early, particularly if you are coordinating several accessories bought at different times.\n\nAn ivory flower girl basket may be part of a wider ivory colour scheme, or it may sit beside a dress in another colour. Either approach is a styling choice. What matters is knowing what you are ordering rather than expecting a bright white accessory.\n\nCompare the colour description with the dress, shoes and any other pieces the child will wear. An exact match is not promised. Screens and lighting can also affect how colours look, so inspect the basket on arrival before deciding whether it works with the outfit.\n\nIf matching shades closely is important to you, leave time for that check. It is easier to make a considered choice when the ceremony is still some way off.\n\nLook at the finish and listed materials\n\nThe basket is described as satin, with listed materials of satin silk and plastic. It also has a pearl handle and bow detail. Those are the details to consider when comparing it with other flower girl accessories.\n\nThe maker's description does not give fabric percentages or explain which material is used in every part. It also does not state the composition of the pearls. A pearl handle basket should not be assumed to contain natural or cultured pearls.\n\nRather than reading extra claims into the material names, focus on the stated appearance and measurements. Decide whether the satin finish, ivory colour and decorative handle suit the outfit and ceremony you have planned.\n\nThere is no need for every accessory to repeat every detail of the dress. You may prefer the bow to be the main link, or simply want an ivory satin basket alongside other ivory pieces.\n\nCheck how the child will carry it\n\nNo age range is specified for this basket. The recorded weight is 0.1 kg, but weight alone does not tell you whether a particular child will manage it comfortably.\n\nCheck the full 20.3 cm height against the child's size and outfit. Think about the route as well. A short, straight walk is different from a route with steps, turns or a long wait before the ceremony begins.\n\nOnce the basket arrives, an adult should assess how the child holds it. Keep any planned contents modest because a carrying limit is not stated. Avoid pulling on the handle or treating the decorative parts as something to swing.\n\nA practice walk is useful for checking the whole plan. The aim is not a flawless performance. It is to see whether the child understands what to do and whether an adult should stay close by.\n\nPlan petals separately\n\nThe pack contains one basket only. Flowers, petals and other styling items need to be arranged separately.\n\nIf you want to use it as a petal carrying basket, choose your petals after confirming the venue's rules. Then test a modest amount in the basket before the day. Since capacity is not given, do not rely on a photo or guess to decide how much it will hold.\n\nConsider the length of the aisle and whether scattering petals is really needed throughout the walk. A child may also prefer simply carrying the basket. Either way, decide in advance so the person helping her knows the plan.\n\nKeep a separate place for spare petals if you need them. Do not assume the basket can hold all the ceremony supplies or carry a heavy refill.\n\nDecide how many baskets you need\n\nEach pack contains one flower girl basket. If two children will each carry a basket, you will need two packs.\n\nWork this out alongside the ceremony order rather than leaving it until the final accessories check. Children walking together may have different roles, so there is no need to assume every child needs the same item.\n\nFor a single flower girl, one basket may be all your plan calls for. For a larger wedding party, write down who is carrying what and who will hand each item out.\n\nThis also helps avoid buying extra pieces without a purpose. Keep the focus on what the ceremony needs and what each child can reasonably manage.\n\nAllow time for delivery and inspection\n\nDelivery is within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nTreat dispatch and delivery as separate parts of the timing. Order well ahead of the wedding date so you have time to receive the parcel, inspect the basket and compare it with the outfit.\n\nOn arrival, check the colour, shape, handle and decorative details before using it. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether the basket is right for your plans.\n\nAn early check also gives you time to ask questions if something is wrong. Do not leave the unopened parcel until the morning of the ceremony.\n\nCare for it gently before and after use\n\nThe maker gives no specific washing method for this satin flower girl basket. Gentle handling is the sensible starting point.\n\nKeep it clean and dry before the wedding. Store it where other items cannot crush its shape or catch the bow and handle details. Avoid packing it tightly under clothes or other accessories.\n\nAfter use, remove loose petals and check for surface marks. If cleaning is needed, test gentle spot cleaning on a hidden area first. Avoid soaking or machine washing because the maker's description does not state that either method is suitable.\n\nFor storage, choose a clean, dry space. Keeping the basket away from pressure and snagging is a simple way to look after its decorative shape without assuming any special care treatment.\n\nKnow your options if plans change\n\nWedding plans can change, and an accessory may not look as expected beside the outfit. Check the basket before using it so you can make that decision while it is still unused.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Keep both the return window and the packaging requirement in mind when your parcel arrives.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Contact us with your order details and explain the issue. No warranty is sold with the basket, and that does not remove your rights under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this wedding ceremony basket if its ivory colour, satin finish, pearl handle and bow detail fit your plans. Check the 13 cm top diameter and 20.3 cm overall height before ordering.\n\nOne basket is included. Petals are separate, and capacity, carrying limits and age suitability are not specified. Confirm venue rules, assess the basket with the child and order well ahead so there is time to check everything before the ceremony.", "llm_summary": "This ivory satin flower girl basket has a pearl handle and bow detail for wedding ceremony use. One basket is included, with no petals or flowers supplied. Listed materials are satin silk and plastic, and pearl composition is not specified. The bowl-shaped basket measures 13 cm across the top and 9.5 cm across the bottom. Its body is 8.5 cm high, with an overall height of 20.3 cm including the handle. Recorded weight is 0.1 kg. Capacity, carrying limit and age suitability are not specified. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days and up to 7 further working days by tracked courier. Change of mind returns require unused condition and original packaging within 14 days of delivery.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/ivory-satin-flower-girl-basket-with-pearl-handle.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie", "sku": "white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie", "title": "White Cotton Happy Tears Wedding Hankie", "slug": "white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie", "price": 31.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.09 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/main-white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "A single white cotton handkerchief gives you a practical accessory to keep nearby during vows and speeches.", "description": "A small item worth planning before the day\n\nWedding planning often focuses on the things everyone will see. A handkerchief is more personal. You may not think about it until a speech catches you off guard or the ceremony becomes emotional. Having one within reach saves you from looking through a bag at that moment.\n\nThe White Cotton Happy Tears Wedding Hankie is a single white cotton handkerchief. Its purpose is straightforward: something to keep nearby for wedding tears. It can be a purchase for yourself or a thoughtful gesture for someone sharing the day with you.\n\nBefore choosing it, look at the practical details rather than the product name alone. Size, pack quantity and where you will carry it matter more than a long list of promises.\n\nWhat the maker's description tells you\n\nThe supplied specifications list white as the colour and cotton as the material. The dimensions are 30.5 x 30.5 x 0.3 cm. The size is also described as 12 inches, which gives you another way to picture its width.\n\nOne handkerchief is included. This is important if you are shopping for several relatives or wedding party members. A single pack will not cover multiple recipients.\n\nSome details are not specified. The maker does not confirm the fabric weave, border finish or whether any words are printed or embroidered on the cloth. “Happy Tears” in the name should not be treated as proof of a particular design. If wording or trim is central to your choice, check before ordering.\n\nHow a wedding handkerchief fits into the day\n\nA handkerchief works by being close when you need it. That sounds obvious, but an accessory left in a suitcase or in another room will not help during the vows.\n\nThink through the parts of the day when you might want it. You could carry it during the ceremony, keep it in a nearby bag during photographs, then have it ready again for speeches. The right place depends on your outfit and how you move between locations.\n\nFor tears, a gentle dabbing motion is a sensible approach. The maker gives no makeup-protection claim for this cotton hankie, so do not expect it to stop makeup transferring. If your makeup routine matters to you, plan how you will touch up separately.\n\nChoosing it for your own outfit\n\nA bridal handkerchief does not need to be a visible part of your outfit. You might prefer to carry it in a bag or ask someone close to you to keep it within reach.\n\nStart with the listed dimensions. A 30.5 cm square gives you a clear reference, but its folded shape will depend on how you arrange it. You can use a piece of paper cut to the listed width to get a rough sense of the area. Paper will not show the cloth's folded thickness, so treat this only as a planning aid.\n\nWhite is the stated colour, not a promise of a shade match. Wedding clothing can vary in tone. If you plan to display the hankie, compare it with your outfit once it arrives rather than relying on the colour name alone.\n\nBuying for a parent or partner\n\nA wedding handkerchief gift can be a quiet way to acknowledge someone who may find the day emotional. It does not need a large presentation or an elaborate message.\n\nIf you are considering a mother of the bride hankie or a mother of the groom handkerchief, think about the recipient's habits. Do they carry a small bag? Would they rather keep it in a pocket? A practical gift is easier to use when it fits what the person already plans to carry.\n\nThe same thinking applies to a partner. A groom handkerchief may be kept out of sight for use rather than displayed. This item is listed as a handkerchief, not a tailored pocket square, so check the fold and pocket fit if appearance is part of the plan.\n\nPlanning quantities for the wedding party\n\nIt is easy to lose track of quantities when you are buying several small wedding accessories. Here, the count is simple: one handkerchief per pack.\n\nWrite down who you are buying for before placing the order. A wedding party handkerchief may be intended for one person, or you may want separate items for a few people. Either way, count recipients rather than assuming a set is included.\n\nAvoid buying extras just because they seem like a usual wedding detail. Some people will appreciate a hankie, while others may already have one they want to carry. A quick check can make the purchase more useful and avoid unnecessary duplicates.\n\nWhat to check if you want a particular look\n\nThe phrase white wedding hankie can bring several styles to mind. Some shoppers picture a plain square. Others expect lace, a stitched message or a decorative edge.\n\nThe maker does not confirm those features. It states the colour, material, size and single-item quantity. Keep that distinction in mind if you are matching the accessory to a detailed wedding theme.\n\nPersonalisation is not offered in the maker's description. Do not assume that names or a wedding date can be added by us. Likewise, gift wrapping and a presentation box are not listed as included. If your gift plan depends on any of those details, clarify them before buying.\n\nGetting it ready without guessing at care\n\nPlan to check the hankie when it arrives, rather than leaving the package unopened until the wedding morning. Confirm that the item matches your needs and decide how you will carry it.\n\nBefore washing or ironing, look for any care label supplied. Cotton is the listed material, but that alone does not give an exact wash temperature or iron setting. The maker does not provide those instructions.\n\nKeep it away from anything that might stain or snag it while you prepare your outfit. If you wash it according to its care instructions, let it dry fully before folding it away. Packing a damp cloth can create an avoidable problem, especially if it will sit with clothing for several days.\n\nMaking a simple handover plan\n\nIf the hankie is a gift, decide when to give it to the recipient. Before the ceremony may be more useful than after the speeches, particularly if you hope they will carry it during the day.\n\nYou could hand it over during preparations or place it with their other planned accessories. Choose an approach that lets them know it is theirs to use, rather than an item they should leave untouched.\n\nFor your own wedding day hankie, give it a clear home. If someone else is carrying it for you, tell them when you may need it. A small amount of planning is more useful here than adding another task to an already busy morning.\n\nDelivery timing and checking your order\n\nThe supplied delivery terms are for Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. You want time not only for delivery, but also to inspect the item and make sure it works with your plans. A wedding accessory is less useful if it arrives too late to check before you leave for the event.\n\nDo not treat delivery timing as a promise that an order placed close to the date will arrive in time. Build in room for your own preparations, especially if you will be travelling before the wedding.\n\nKeeping it afterwards or returning it unused\n\nYou may want to keep a handkerchief for wedding tears as a reminder of the day. That is a personal choice, not an included keepsake service. Follow the supplied care guidance and store it clean and fully dry.\n\nIf you decide it is not right before using it, change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery. The item must be unused and in its original packaging, and you pay return postage.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Check the order when it arrives so you have time to raise any concern rather than discovering a problem during final wedding preparations.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this cotton wedding handkerchief if a single white hankie fits your plans. Use the listed 30.5 x 30.5 cm size to work out where you will carry it, and remember that decorative details are not confirmed by the maker.\n\nFor yourself or as a gift, the most useful choice is one that reaches the right person before it is needed. Check the details, order ahead and give it a place in the day.", "llm_summary": "The White Cotton Happy Tears Wedding Hankie is a single white cotton handkerchief intended as a wedding accessory. The listed dimensions are 30.5 x 30.5 x 0.3 cm, and the size is also described as 12 inches. Maker specifications list an item weight of 0.19 pounds; the maker's description's weight field is 0.09 kg. The pack contains one handkerchief. Fabric weave, trim, printed or embroidered wording, country of origin, and exact washing instructions are not specified by the maker. Dispatch is within 2 working days, with delivery then taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier in Australia only. Unused items in their original packaging may be returned for change of mind within 14 days of delivery, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-cotton-happy-tears-wedding-hankie.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative", "sku": "white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative", "title": "White Wedding Ring Box", "slug": "white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative", "price": 111.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-accessories", "category_label": "Bridal Accessories", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.15 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/main-white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-accessories/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "A magnetic closure and white felt liner bring a simple, enclosed option to your ring presentation.", "description": "A place for the rings before the vows\n\nThere is a small but important detail to settle before a wedding ceremony. Who will carry the rings, where will they wait, and how will they reach the couple? A ring pillow is one option, but you may prefer a box that closes.\n\nThis white wedding ring box is an alternative to a ring cushion. It has a square shape, a smooth white finish and black writing on the lid and inside. A magnetic closure keeps the lid closed, while a white felt liner is designed to hold two or more rings.\n\nThe choice is partly about appearance, but it is also about the handover. Before ordering, think about who will carry the box and how they will open it. A short practice is more useful than choosing on looks alone.\n\nHow the ring box works\n\nThe idea is straightforward. Place the rings inside the lined box, close the lid and open it when the rings are needed. Unlike a cushion, this gives you a lid between the rings and their surroundings while the box is closed.\n\nThe magnetic closure holds the lid shut. It should not be treated as a lock, and the maker's description does not describe it as tamper-proof. Handle the box with care and check that it has closed before passing it to someone else.\n\nThe white felt liner is designed for two or more rings. That does not confirm a fit for every ring size or band width. The internal measurements and exact ring-holding layout are not stated, so allow time to check your own rings before the day.\n\nWho might prefer a ring bearer box?\n\nA ring bearer box is worth considering if you want the rings presented in a closed container rather than on a pillow. It may also appeal if you have chosen white accessories and want a box with a simple square outline.\n\nIt is not essential to have a child carry it. You can arrange for an adult to bring the rings forward or keep them ready for the exchange. Choose the plan that makes sense for your ceremony rather than building the ceremony around an accessory.\n\nIf a child will carry the box, arrange an adult-supervised practice. No age suitability is given. Check whether the child can hold it comfortably, keep it level and pass it over without struggling. You can also use a practice run without the rings while everyone learns their part.\n\nCheck the measurements before choosing\n\nThe supplied measurements need care. The description gives a width of 3.35 inches and a height of 3 inches, then also describes the box as 2 inches tall. These are not clear enough to assign a reliable length, width and height.\n\nDo not assume which measurement belongs to which side. If the box must fit into a particular pocket, tray or display space, confirm the dimensions before ordering. The same applies if you have a small space set aside beside the ceremony paperwork.\n\nIt helps to measure the space you intend to use first. Leave room to grasp the box and open its lid, not just space for its closed outline. For a pocket, check the actual outfit rather than another jacket with a similar cut. Pocket openings and linings can differ.\n\nMake sure your rings suit the interior\n\nThe capacity is described as two or more rings, which makes this a possible wedding ring holder for a pair of bands. However, a capacity statement is not the same as an internal size guide.\n\nBroad bands, raised settings and unusually shaped rings may need different amounts of space. The maker does not provide slot dimensions, ring size limits or details of how each ring sits in the liner. Those points remain unknown.\n\nOnce the box arrives, inspect it before use and check the rings gently when you are ready to keep it. Make sure they can be placed and removed without force. If you need a confirmed fit before purchase, ask for further details rather than relying on the exterior measurements.\n\nConsider the white finish and black writing\n\nColour is one of the easier parts of this choice. The box has a smooth white finish and a white felt liner, with black writing on both the lid and inside. That contrast is part of the design.\n\nThe exact wording is not given by the maker by the maker. If the text matters to you, confirm it before placing an order. Do not assume that the lid is blank, that the inside has no writing or that either can be personalised.\n\nWhen comparing wedding ceremony accessories, look at the whole object rather than just its main colour. Consider the writing, shape and size together. This is especially useful if you plan to photograph the box beside other items or include it in a close-up of the ring exchange.\n\nPlan the handover, not just the presentation\n\nA wedding ring presentation box has a practical job during a brief moment. Decide who is responsible for it from the start of the ceremony until the rings are exchanged. One clear plan helps avoid last-minute questions.\n\nWork through the handover in order. Who brings it forward? Who opens the lid? Who removes the rings? Decide where the empty box goes afterwards as well, so nobody is left holding it without knowing what comes next.\n\nYou do not need a full rehearsal to answer these questions. A few minutes with the people involved can show whether the plan feels comfortable. Practise with the actual box once you have decided to keep it, particularly if the person carrying it has not used a magnetic ring box before.\n\nUsing the box in photographs\n\nYou may want the ring box in photographs before or during the ceremony. Its white finish, square shape and black writing are details to consider when planning those images. Let your photographer know if you want it included.\n\nCheck how the lid and interior text appear when the box is open. Since the wording is not specified by the maker, confirm it rather than planning a photograph around an assumed message.\n\nKeep the ring box close to the person responsible for the rings during preparations. If it moves between a photograph area and the ceremony space, agree who will carry it back. The aim is a clear handover, not an elaborate display that makes the rings harder to locate.\n\nCare before and after the wedding\n\nHandle the box with clean, dry hands. For routine dust, use a soft, dry cloth on the outer surface. Avoid abrasive cleaners, soaking or scrubbing the felt liner.\n\nThe box construction material is not specified, so there is no basis for recommending a particular polish or cleaning liquid. Keep care gentle. If you are considering any cleaning treatment, test a hidden area first and stop if the finish changes.\n\nWeather resistance is also not stated. For an outdoor ceremony, plan to keep the box dry and protected rather than assuming it can cope with rain or damp ground. After the wedding, store it away from moisture and direct heat.\n\nAllow time for delivery and inspection\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Delivery is available within Australia only.\n\nAllow time beyond arrival to look over the box and settle your handover plan. Check the finish, writing and size before using it. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether the item suits your needs.\n\nIf you change your mind, returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay the return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nKeeping it or giving it as a gift\n\nAfter the ceremony, you may choose to keep the box as a reminder of the day. It can be considered as a wedding keepsake box, but no long-term jewellery protection is specified. Do not assume it replaces storage chosen for that purpose.\n\nIt may also be a useful gift for a couple who have not yet chosen their ring presentation. Ask first, since they may already have a ring pillow, box or family item in mind. Check that the white finish and fixed black writing suit their plans.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this white wedding ring box if you want a square, felt-lined alternative to a ring pillow with a magnetic closure. One box is included, and the liner is designed for two or more rings.\n\nBefore ordering, clarify the conflicting height descriptions and check any details that matter to your plans, including ring fit and the exact writing. Order early, inspect it on arrival and practise the handover. Those checks will help you decide whether it belongs in your ceremony.", "llm_summary": "This white wedding ring box is a square ring pillow alternative supplied as one box. It has a smooth white finish, black writing on the lid and inside, a magnetic closure and a white felt liner designed to hold two or more rings. The listed weight is 0.15 kg. Measurements are described as 3.35 inches wide by 3 inches high and also 2 inches tall, so the height needs confirmation. The box construction material, exact writing, internal measurements and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by up to 7 working days by tracked courier in Australia only. Unused change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days in original packaging.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-wedding-ring-box-pillow-alternative.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser", "sku": "boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser", "title": "Boho Wedding Planner Book and Organiser", "slug": "boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser", "price": 53.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-party-gifts", "category_label": "Bridal Party Gifts", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.85 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/main-boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "Tabbed planning pages and storage pockets keep your decisions, contacts and loose notes together.", "description": "When wedding notes start to spread\n\nWedding planning often begins with a few ideas and quickly turns into paperwork. A venue quote sits in your inbox, a florist's card goes into your bag, and the guest list lives on a loose sheet. Finding the latest decision can take longer than making it.\n\nA wedding planner book gives those details a shared home. It does not make the choices for you, but it can make them easier to find and discuss. That matters when you are comparing costs or trying to remember what you agreed at an appointment.\n\nThis boho wedding planner has 132 pages, themed tabs and pockets for loose references. It suits people who like to write things down and keep a physical record of their plans.\n\nWhat this planner includes\n\nThe book has sections for wedding vision, budgeting, the guest list, vendors and the wedding day. Those headings cover distinct jobs, from setting an overall direction to recording practical arrangements.\n\nIts cover features pampas grass and boho flowers. Rose gold spiral wire and corner protectors are also listed. These are design details rather than a rule for your celebration. You can choose a pampas grass wedding planner even if your wedding will have a different look.\n\nOne planner is supplied. The listed material is paper, and no pens or other planning accessories are included in the maker's description. The number of pockets, paper weight and book thickness are not specified.\n\nHow the sections help you plan\n\nA tabbed wedding organiser is most useful when each section has a clear job. Start with the wedding vision section to record what matters to you as a couple. You might note the atmosphere you want, the parts you care about most and the choices you have not made yet.\n\nUse the budget section for money-related notes. Keep quoted amounts separate from confirmed costs so you can tell them apart at a glance. This is a suggested planning habit, not a claim about the printed page layout.\n\nThe guest list and vendor sections give people-related details their own place. The wedding day section can hold your notes about arrangements for the day itself. The exact prompts on individual pages are not stated, so do not assume a particular worksheet is included.\n\nDecide whether paper fits your routine\n\nA paper wedding planner works well when you enjoy writing during a conversation or looking back through earlier notes. You can take it to a meeting, turn to the right section and keep the discussion in front of you.\n\nIt is less suited to instant updates between people in different places. If you already share a digital calendar or spreadsheet, you do not need to abandon it. Decide which information belongs in each place.\n\nFor example, you could keep appointments in a shared calendar and use the book for meeting notes and decisions. The key is to avoid having two different versions of the same information. Agree on where the current plan lives.\n\nCheck the size before choosing\n\nThe listed size is 23 x 28 cm, and the item weighs 0.85 kg. Those details deserve a quick check before you picture carrying it everywhere. Measure the inside of the bag you normally use, rather than judging from its outside shape.\n\nThink about what else comes with you to an appointment. A bag that holds the planner on its own may feel crowded once you add your everyday belongings. The book's thickness is not stated.\n\nIf you mostly plan at home, give it an easy-to-reach spot near your usual workspace. A wedding appointment notebook is more useful when you can find it before leaving, rather than searching for it at the door.\n\nMake the budget section useful\n\nA wedding budget planner is a place to record costs, but the habit behind it matters just as much. Update your notes after a quote changes or a booking is confirmed. Waiting several weeks makes it harder to remember which figures are current.\n\nWhen comparing suppliers, write down what each price covers. Two similar totals may include different services or quantities. Keep the original quote available so you can check the details before making a commitment.\n\nDo not treat a handwritten note as a replacement for a contract, invoice or receipt. Keep those documents safely and use the planner as your working reference. The maker does not state that full-size documents will fit in the pockets.\n\nKeep guest and vendor notes clear\n\nThe wedding guest list organiser section can give your guest notes a consistent home. Decide how you will mark updates before you start. Clear handwriting and a simple system can save confusion when names or plans change.\n\nThere is no stated guest capacity for the book. If you need space for a large list, check the page layout before ordering rather than assuming it will suit every wedding size.\n\nUse the wedding vendor organiser section to note questions before appointments and decisions afterwards. Dating your notes helps you tell an early conversation from a later agreement. If something needs confirmation, mark it clearly and check it with the maker.\n\nUse the pockets without creating clutter\n\nLoose papers are useful until they become a pile you cannot sort. The included pockets are described as holding magazine cut-outs, business cards and notes. They let you keep small references near your written plans.\n\nBe selective about what stays in the book. Keep a cut-out if it explains an idea you still want to discuss. Remove old notes once you have copied any details you need and confirmed that nothing important will be lost.\n\nPocket dimensions and capacity are not specified. Avoid forcing bulky items into them or assuming they will hold every piece of wedding paperwork. A separate folder may be useful for documents that do not fit.\n\nShare the planning with your partner\n\nA bride and groom planner can be a shared resource rather than one person's task book. Set aside a short time to review open questions together. Bring the book so you are both working from the same notes.\n\nTalk about priorities before filling pages with options. One person may care most about the meal, while the other wants more time with guests. Recording those preferences can help explain later choices.\n\nYou do not need to complete every section in order. Start with the decisions that affect what happens next. Return to the other sections as your plans become clearer, keeping confirmed arrangements easy to tell apart from ideas.\n\nChoosing it as an engagement gift\n\nAn engagement gift planner is worth considering for someone who enjoys notebooks, lists and handwritten plans. It gives them a practical place to begin without choosing wedding decorations or a theme on their behalf.\n\nBefore buying, quietly check whether the couple already has a bridal planning book. Some people have a strong preference for a particular layout, while others would rather manage everything digitally. Their planning habits matter more than the cover design.\n\nThe boho artwork may appeal to someone who likes floral stationery. No personalisation service is listed, so choose it for the supplied design. Allow enough delivery time if you want to give it at an engagement celebration.\n\nCare, delivery and returns\n\nKeep the planner dry and away from food or drink spills while you work. Handle tabs gently and avoid overfilling the pockets. A soft dry cloth can remove dust from the cover without wetting the paper.\n\nAfter the wedding, you can keep it as a wedding keepsake book. Its notes may record choices and ideas you would otherwise forget. Store it away from damp conditions and prolonged direct sunlight.\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding or gift date.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this wedding day planning book if you want paper notes, themed sections and pockets together in one organiser. Its 132 pages cover wedding vision, budgeting, guests, vendors and the wedding day.\n\nCheck the 23 x 28 cm size and 0.85 kg weight against how you plan to use it. If a specific page layout matters, confirm that detail before ordering. The most useful planner is one you will keep close, update regularly and return to when the next decision comes along.", "llm_summary": "This boho wedding planner book and organiser is a single paper item with 132 pages. Its listed size is 23 x 28 cm and its weight is 0.85 kg. The cover features pampas grass and boho flowers, with rose gold spiral wire and corner protectors. Themed tabs cover wedding vision, budgeting, the guest list, vendors and the wedding day. Pockets hold magazine cut-outs, business cards and notes. It is intended for wedding planning and can be given as an engagement gift to brides, grooms or couples. The listed colour is Boho. Thickness, paper weight, pocket count and country of origin are not specified by the maker. One item is supplied.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/boho-wedding-planner-book-and-organiser.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set", "sku": "bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set", "title": "Bride To Be Sash, Veil and Headband Set", "slug": "bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set", "price": 37.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-party-gifts", "category_label": "Bridal Party Gifts", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "60 g", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/main-bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "A sash, veil and rose gold headband give you three accessories to plan around for celebrations and photos.", "description": "Finding the bride's party accessories can turn into a long list of small decisions. A sash may suit the outfit, but then you still need to think about a headpiece and whether a veil belongs in the photos. Buying a set gives you a clear starting point, provided the pieces suit the person wearing them.\n\nThis Bride To Be Sash Veil and Headband Set includes those three accessories. It is listed for hen parties, bachelorette celebrations and wedding photo props. Before choosing it, look beyond the theme and check the measurements, colour details and delivery timing. Those checks matter more than assuming that one bridal set will suit every bride.\n\nStart with the bride's plans\n\nThink about what the bride actually wants to wear. Some people enjoy a full set of hen party outfit accessories. Others prefer one visible detail and want to keep the rest of their outfit simple. Ask before buying if you are unsure, especially when the set is intended as a surprise gift.\n\nConsider when she might use the pieces, too. A photo session at the start of a celebration may call for a different look from the rest of the event. You do not need to plan around wearing every accessory all day. Start with the bride's preferences, then decide whether this three-piece bridal set meets them.\n\nKnow what is included\n\nThe pack contains a bride-to-be sash, a veil and a headband. The headpiece is a headband, not a tiara. That distinction is useful when comparing products because the shape of the headpiece may be central to the look you want.\n\nOnly those three accessories are listed as included. Plan your outfit and any other photo props separately. If you have a particular picture in mind, write down what it needs and check each item against the pack contents. A product chosen for bride photo props does not include the rest of the scene around it.\n\nHow the set comes together\n\nThe set brings a sash and two head accessories into one purchase. Its role is to give you pieces for a bridal celebration look, rather than a complete outfit. You can compare them with clothing you already have or use them as a starting point when choosing what to wear.\n\nFastening details are not specified for the sash or veil. The maker's description also does not state whether the headband has an adjustment feature. Once the order arrives, inspect how each piece is worn before making final plans. Do not assume that extra clips, combs or pins come with the set.\n\nCheck the sash against the outfit\n\nThe sash measures 160 x 9.5 cm. Use a tape measure to help picture that length and width against the intended outfit. It is more useful to make this comparison than to rely on a broad claim about universal fit.\n\nThink about where you want the sash to sit and whether it will cover a detail on the clothing. Necklines, sleeves and decorative features can all affect your preferred placement. The listed length does not confirm a particular fastening method or adjustable range, so avoid treating it as a guaranteed fit for every wearer.\n\nIf you are buying the hen party sash for someone else, ask for help with this check. A brief conversation may save the bride from receiving something that does not suit her chosen clothes.\n\nCompare the headband and veil sizes\n\nThe headband measures 12 x 18 cm, while the veil measures 70 x 84 cm. These are separate measurements for separate pieces. They should not be confused with the overall product dimensions of 30 x 20 x 3.5 cm.\n\nFor the headband, compare the listed size with what the bride usually finds comfortable. No stretch range is given. For the veil, use the measurements to picture how much space it may take around the planned hairstyle.\n\nIf a hairdresser is helping with the celebration look, share the accessory details before the appointment. The attachment method is unknown, so there may be questions that can only be answered by checking the actual pieces. Leave time for that check before the event.\n\nRead the colour details carefully\n\nThe maker describes a white bride sash, a rose gold headband and gold accents in the set. Those details can help you decide whether the accessories belong with the outfit or party colours. They do not establish an exact shade match with decorations you already own.\n\nThe separate colour attribute is blank, and the veil's colour is not clearly specified in the written details. If that detail is important to your plans, confirm it before ordering. Do not fill the gap by assuming every piece has the same colour.\n\nIt can help to decide which colour matters most to you. Someone searching for a rose gold headband may focus on the headpiece, while another buyer may care more about how the sash looks against a dress.\n\nDecide whether a set is the right choice\n\nA set makes sense when you want all the listed pieces and their measurements suit your plans. It may be less useful if the bride already has a veil or wants a different style of headpiece. Compare the contents with what is already organised before adding more accessories.\n\nThe best hen party gift is one that reflects the recipient's preferences, not just the party theme. If she has chosen a very specific outfit, ask whether she wants accessories added to it. If she would rather choose for herself, share the measurements and let her decide.\n\nThe same approach helps when choosing bridal shower accessories. Start with the person and the occasion rather than expecting the product name alone to settle the choice.\n\nPlan the photo moment\n\nWedding photo accessories and hen party props work best when they support the photo you actually want. Think about who will be in the picture, what the bride wants to wear and when there will be time to take it.\n\nYou might plan one photo with the full set and another with fewer pieces. That is a styling choice, not a requirement to use every item throughout the celebration. Check the pieces together beforehand so you can decide without rushing.\n\nNo outdoor performance or wind resistance is stated. If you are planning photographs outside, consider the conditions and avoid assuming that the veil will stay in a particular position. The set also carries no promise of suitability for a specific venue.\n\nHandle and store it with care\n\nMaterials and detailed cleaning instructions are not specified. That means you should not assume the sash or veil can go in a washing machine, or that the headband can be cleaned with a particular product. Check any labels that arrive with the order first.\n\nUntil you have suitable guidance, handle the pieces gently and keep them away from objects that might snag them. Store the set somewhere dry, away from direct sunlight. Do not apply heat in an attempt to alter its shape or remove marks without appropriate care instructions.\n\nKeep the original packaging while you decide whether to keep the set. This also matters if you want to use the change of mind return option, which requires the item to be unused and in its original packaging.\n\nGive delivery enough time\n\nDelivery for this set is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Dispatch time and delivery time are separate parts of the order journey, so allow for both when planning.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding or hen party. Receiving the set early gives you time to check the contents, measurements and attachment details before the celebration. Avoid building a fixed-date plan around a last-minute order.\n\nIf you change your mind, returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, and no separate warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis bride celebration set contains a sash, veil and headband, with a white sash, rose gold headband and gold accents described by the maker. Check the individual sizes against the bride's outfit and hairstyle, and remember that materials and fastening details are not specified.\n\nChoose it because the contents suit her plans. Allow enough time for Australian dispatch and delivery, inspect the pieces before the event, and keep the packaging until you are sure it is the right set.", "llm_summary": "This bride-to-be accessory set contains three pieces, a sash, a veil and a headband. The sash measures 160 x 9.5 cm, the headband measures 12 x 18 cm and the veil measures 70 x 84 cm. Colour details describe a white sash, a rose gold headband and gold accents. The headpiece is a headband rather than a tiara. Overall product dimensions are listed as 30 x 20 x 3.5 cm, with an item weight of 60 g. Materials, country of origin, fastening details and adjustment features are not specified by the maker. Intended uses include hen parties, bachelorette celebrations and wedding photo props. Delivery is Australia only, by tracked courier after dispatch within 2 working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/bride-to-be-sash-veil-and-headband-set.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon", "sku": "white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon", "title": "White Magnetic Gift Box with Ribbon", "slug": "white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon", "price": 25.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "bridal-party-gifts", "category_label": "Bridal Party Gifts", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon/main-white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/bridal-party-gifts/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon-3.jpg" ], "description_short": "A collapsible cardboard design, magnetic lid and ribbon bring your gift presentation together without wrapping paper.", "description": "A tidy way to bring a gift together\n\nYou have picked the presents, but they still need a way to travel from your hands to theirs. Wrapping several small items can be awkward. Different shapes make uneven parcels, and loose pieces can be hard to arrange as one gift.\n\nA white magnetic gift box with ribbon offers a simple starting point. Put your chosen contents inside, close the lid and tie the ribbon. The box becomes the outer presentation, so you do not need to cover it with wrapping paper.\n\nThis one is an empty cardboard box with listed measurements of 23 x 17 x 7 cm. It is intended for gifts you supply yourself. That gives you freedom to choose the contents, but it also makes checking the fit an important part of buying.\n\nWhat comes with the box\n\nEach purchase contains one white gift box with ribbon. It has a magnetic lid closure and a collapsible cardboard construction. The sides form into place using adhesive corner connections.\n\nThe gifts shown or imagined inside a gift box are a separate decision. No jewellery, cosmetics, candles, food, drinks or decorative accessories are included here. If you want a card or a layer of protective packing, add those to your own preparation list.\n\nThis distinction matters when planning wedding party gift packaging. Work out how many recipients you have, then count the boxes and contents separately. One box per purchase means a group of recipients will need the same number of boxes if everyone is receiving an individual gift.\n\nHow the assembly and closure work\n\nThe box is formed by peeling the backing from its triangular adhesive sections, bringing the cardboard into shape and pressing the corner connections firmly. Extra tape is not needed for that assembly method.\n\nTake a moment to check the orientation before exposing the adhesive. Set the box on a clean, dry surface and form the corners carefully. It is easier to get a tidy result when the sides are lined up before you press them together.\n\nOnce packed, the magnetic lid closes over the contents. The ribbon can then be tied into a bow. The magnetic fastening is a closure for gift presentation, not a stated airtight seal or transport lock.\n\nAlthough this is a collapsible gift box, repeated folding after assembly is not confirmed. Its adhesive connections are worth keeping in mind if you hope to flatten it again later.\n\nStart with the size of your presents\n\nThe listed size is 23 cm long, 17 cm wide and 7 cm high. The maker does not say whether these are internal or external measurements. Treat them as a starting point, rather than a promise of exact usable space.\n\nMeasure your presents while they are still in any packaging you plan to keep. A perfume bottle may have a cap that adds height. A small cup may have a handle that makes it much wider than its base. A jewellery case can take up more room than the jewellery itself.\n\nLeave clearance rather than planning to fill every centimetre. The lid should close without pressure from the contents. Any protective material also needs room, especially if you are placing several items side by side.\n\nA quick paper layout can help. Mark the listed length and width on paper, arrange your items within it, then check their height separately. This will not confirm the internal fit, but it can rule out gifts that are clearly too large.\n\nPlanning a bridal party proposal\n\nA proposal gift box gives you a place to bring together the items you have chosen for someone you want beside you on the day. The box does not need to be full to make that gesture clear.\n\nFor a bridesmaid proposal box, start with the main gift and your message. Check their combined size before adding anything else. Too many small extras can make an arrangement harder to pack, particularly when the available height is only 7 cm as listed.\n\nThe same approach works for a groomsmen proposal box. Decide on the actual contents first, rather than assuming a familiar gift category will fit. Socks, a watch in its case or another small present will each have different space needs.\n\nIf you are preparing several boxes, test one arrangement before assembling the rest. That gives you a chance to adjust the contents while the plan is still easy to change.\n\nOther occasions that suit an empty gift box\n\nA white box is not tied to a single occasion. It can serve as a birthday gift box, a thank you gift box or Christmas gift packaging, with the contents setting the tone.\n\nThe empty format is useful when you want to choose each part of a present yourself. You might already have a small gift and need only a way to present it. You might also want to group a few separate purchases into one handover.\n\nFor jewellery gift packaging, keep delicate pieces in their own suitable case or pouch. No fitted insert or divider is listed with this box. The outer box gives you presentation space, but it does not replace the protection a particular gift may need.\n\nThe best gift box for your plans is the one that fits the actual contents. Choosing by occasion alone is less useful than checking measurements and handling needs.\n\nPacking without crowding the lid\n\nBefore fixing your final arrangement, place the contents inside and gently test the lid. If it presses against a bottle cap or raised corner, change the layout rather than forcing it shut.\n\nKeep items in their own suitable packaging where needed. Food should remain in food-safe packaging because direct food-contact suitability is not stated. Liquids should be sealed in their own containers.\n\nFor multiple gifts, think about what happens when the box is lifted, not only how it looks on a table. Loose objects can move. Add suitable protection separately if your contents need it, while leaving enough space for the lid to close.\n\nNo load limit is specified. Avoid treating a small present box as a carrier for heavy objects, and support the base when moving a filled box. If weight is central to your plan, check suitability before ordering.\n\nFinishing the presentation simply\n\nThe ribbon is already part of this gift box, so you have a finishing detail without needing a separate roll of wrapping paper. Tie it after you have checked the contents and closed the lid.\n\nA separate card can sit with the gifts if there is room. If you want to use an outside label, remember that no label or personalisation service is included. Test any decoration method cautiously rather than assuming how it will behave on the surface.\n\nYou do not need to add lots of extras. A clear arrangement makes it easier for the recipient to see and remove the gift. Leave yourself time to make a few adjustments before the handover instead of packing at the last moment.\n\nCare before and after gifting\n\nCardboard needs dry storage. Keep the box away from spills, damp floors and areas where moisture collects. Store it where heavier items cannot crush the lid or corners.\n\nFor light dust, use a soft, dry cloth. Avoid soaking or scrubbing. Handle the ribbon and corners gently when opening, packing or moving the box.\n\nNo waterproof rating, board thickness or load limit is supplied. Those gaps are a reason to use care, not to assume extra strength. If you keep the box after gifting, choose light contents that fit comfortably and continue to store it somewhere dry.\n\nAllow time for delivery and preparation\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nFor a wedding or another fixed date, order well ahead. You need time not only for the parcel to arrive, but also to inspect the box, check your gifts inside it and finish the presentation. Preparing several boxes may take longer than expected.\n\nThis magnetic closure gift box is presentation packaging, not a stated postal shipping box. If you plan to send your finished gift onward, use suitable outer packaging and protection. The right packing depends on the gifts inside as well as the box itself.\n\nCheck suitability before assembly\n\nWhen your box arrives, check it before assembling or filling it. Confirm that it suits your intended arrangement while keeping the original packaging.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThat is another reason to plan early. You can review the size and condition without having to make a rushed decision just before an event.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this white magnetic gift box when you want an empty cardboard presentation box with a ribbon and magnetic lid. One box is supplied, with listed dimensions of 23 x 17 x 7 cm.\n\nMeasure your gifts first, allow clearance and keep any protective packaging in your size checks. Assemble carefully, pack without forcing the lid, and order well ahead of your gifting date.", "llm_summary": "This white magnetic gift box with ribbon is an empty cardboard box for presenting separately purchased gifts. One box is supplied. Its listed dimensions are 23 x 17 x 7 cm in length, width and height order. It has a magnetic lid closure and a collapsible construction with adhesive corner connections. Assembly involves peeling the triangular adhesive backing, forming the box and pressing the connections before tying the ribbon. Extra assembly tape is not needed. Suggested uses include bridal party proposals, birthdays and Christmas presents, subject to the contents fitting. Internal dimensions, weight, load limit and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Gifts and display accessories are not included. Delivery is available within Australia only.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-magnetic-gift-box-with-ribbon.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses", "sku": "mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses", "title": "Mr and Mrs Diamond Stemless Wine Glasses", "slug": "mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses", "price": 55.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "cake-and-toasting", "category_label": "Cake And Toasting", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/main-mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "A diamond-shaped glass design and included message card give a wedding or anniversary gift a personal finishing touch.", "description": "A gift that connects with the occasion\n\nFinding a wedding gift can be harder than it looks. You may want something linked to the day without choosing a large display piece or guessing what the couple needs for their home. Glassware offers another route, especially when the recipients enjoy sharing a drink.\n\nThese Mr and Mrs stemless wine glasses combine a marriage theme with a diamond-shaped form. They are listed for weddings, engagements, bridal showers and anniversaries. A message card is included, giving you somewhere to add a few words that connect the gift to the people receiving it.\n\nBefore ordering, there are two details worth checking. The stated size is 9 cm x 11 cm, and the individual glass count is unclear. The description refers to a set, while the count fields list 1 item and 1.0 count. If you need a pair, get that confirmed first.\n\nWhat makes the design different?\n\nThe main visual feature is the diamond shape. Instead of a rounded wine-glass bowl on a stem, this design has an angular form without a stem. That is the key reason to consider it if you are comparing several types of wedding gift glasses.\n\nStemless glassware is held around the body. It feels different from holding a traditional wine glass by its stem, so the choice is partly about personal preference. Think about what the recipients already enjoy using rather than assuming one style is better.\n\nThe shape also matters when planning storage or a table layout. An angular glass may occupy space differently from the glasses you already own. Use the listed measurements as a starting point, but do not treat them as a full technical drawing. The maker does not identify the height, width or base size separately.\n\nHow the glassware works with a drink\n\nThe maker describes these glasses for wine, whiskey, bourbon and scotch. That gives a useful picture of their intended use, though it does not provide a serving capacity.\n\nAs a drink is poured or gently swirled, it moves around the shaped bowl. The source links this movement with aeration, but there is no measured performance information. It is better to choose these diamond shaped wine glasses because you like their form and theme, not because you expect a particular change in flavour.\n\nCapacity matters if you are planning a formal toast or a measured serving. Outside dimensions alone cannot tell you how much a glass holds. Confirm the volume before using it to work out drink quantities or serving sizes for an event.\n\nWho the Mr and Mrs theme suits\n\nThe wording is a clear part of the gift. For a couple who use Mr and Mrs and enjoy marriage-themed items, it can make sense for an engagement, wedding or anniversary.\n\nIt is also worth pausing over the titles. Not every married couple uses them, and not every couple wants wedding wording on their everyday glassware. The most thoughtful choice is the one that fits the recipients, rather than the one that simply matches the occasion.\n\nFor engagement gift glasses, consider whether the couple would enjoy receiving a wedding-themed present before the day itself. For an anniversary, think about whether they still enjoy keeping items connected to their marriage. These are small questions, but they help you choose a gift with a clear purpose.\n\nChoosing between a gift and event glassware\n\nBuying a present and buying glassware for a wedding table are different tasks. A gift can be chosen mainly around the recipients' taste. Event glassware also needs to fit a practical plan.\n\nIf these are intended as bride and groom glasses for a toast, confirm that the pack contains the number you need. The source wording is not clear enough to promise two individual glasses. Do not order on the assumption that a plural product name settles the count.\n\nFor wedding table glassware, check the space around place settings, flowers and other decorations. The listed 9 cm x 11 cm size can help with early planning, but exact measurement orientation still needs checking. Nothing in the maker's description confirms suitability for a particular venue or table arrangement.\n\nReading the specifications without guessing\n\nA short product record can leave gaps that matter. Here, the specifications identify glass as the material and diamond as the shape. They also give the Mr and Mrs theme and the listed size.\n\nThey do not state weight, capacity, glass grade or country of origin. Exact colours are also unclear. Although the source uses Mr and Mrs in its colour field, that is wording rather than a usable colour description.\n\nIf you are matching a strict wedding palette, ask for colour confirmation before ordering. The same applies if you need the glasses to fit a narrow shelf, gift box or place setting. Checking one missing detail early is easier than trying to work around it close to the event.\n\nMaking the included card count\n\nThe supplied message card is a useful part of the gift because it lets you add something personal without changing the glassware. A short handwritten note can explain why you chose the present or mark the date in your own words.\n\nKeep the message close to the recipients. You might wish them well for their wedding or acknowledge an anniversary. There is no need for a long verse if a few direct sentences sound more like you.\n\nThe card should not be confused with a custom product service. No engraving or name personalisation is stated for these his and hers glasses. If you want names, initials or a wedding date on the glass itself, check before ordering. Do not assume that service comes with the Mr and Mrs design.\n\nPlanning when to order\n\nTiming matters when a gift is tied to a fixed date. Delivery is available within Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days. Delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding, shower or anniversary. Avoid planning around the latest possible arrival day, especially if you still need time to check the contents and write the card.\n\nWhen the parcel arrives, inspect the glassware before putting it away for the occasion. Check the contents and look for any damage. If there is a problem, contact us rather than leaving the parcel unopened until the day you intend to give it.\n\nCaring for stemless wedding glasses\n\nGentle hand washing is a cautious choice because dishwasher suitability is not specified. Use mild washing-up liquid and a soft cloth, then rinse and dry the glasses carefully.\n\nAvoid abrasive cleaners. Do not assume that the glassware can handle hot drinks, a microwave or sudden changes in temperature. Heat resistance is not given by the maker, so those uses need confirmation from product-specific instructions.\n\nBefore each use, look for chips or cracks. Stop using damaged glassware. When storing the glasses, leave enough room to prevent them knocking against other items, and do not assume they are designed to stack.\n\nThese basic habits are useful whether the glasses become regular drinkware or stay tucked away as a marriage keepsake gift.\n\nWhat to check before you commit\n\nA useful buying decision comes down to a few practical questions. Does the couple like the Mr and Mrs wording? Do they prefer stemless glasses? Does the diamond shape suit their taste?\n\nThen check the details that affect use. Confirm the individual glass count, ask about capacity if serving size matters, and compare the listed measurements with the intended space. If exact colour is important, settle that before purchase too.\n\nThis is not about making a small gift complicated. It is about avoiding assumptions. Couples wine glasses can be a thoughtful choice, but they still need to suit the people and the purpose.\n\nIf you are comparing options, focus on the facts you can verify rather than broad claims about quality or drinking performance. Shape, material, wording and confirmed pack contents give you a firmer basis for choosing.\n\nIf your plans change\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage, so keep the packaging while deciding whether the glassware is right for your plans.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Contact us if something arrives damaged, and do not use a chipped or cracked glass.\n\nThese terms are worth reading before ordering for a date-sensitive occasion. They also make it sensible to inspect the parcel promptly, even if the gift will not be handed over for several weeks.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose these Mr and Mrs stemless glasses if the marriage theme and diamond-shaped design fit the recipients. They are listed as glass, measure 9 cm x 11 cm, and come with a message card.\n\nConfirm the number of individual glasses before buying for a shared toast. Check any missing size or capacity details that matter to your plans, order well ahead, and handle the glassware with care.", "llm_summary": "Mr and Mrs Stemless Wine Glasses are diamond-shaped glassware intended for wedding, engagement, bridal shower and anniversary gifting. The listed material is glass, and the stated size is 9 cm x 11 cm. The design is stemless and is described for wine, whiskey, bourbon and scotch. A message card is included. The source describes a set, but its count fields state 1 item and 1.0 count, so the number of individual glasses needs confirmation. Capacity, weight, exact colours, country of origin and dishwasher suitability are not specified by the maker. Custom engraving is not stated. Delivery is Australia only by tracked courier, with dispatch within 2 working days and delivery then taking up to 7 working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/mr-and-mrs-stemless-wine-glasses.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set", "sku": "silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set", "title": "Silver Wedding Cake Knife and Server Set", "slug": "silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set", "price": 110.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "cake-and-toasting", "category_label": "Cake And Toasting", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.27 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set/main-silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "A long cake knife and matching server combine stainless steel construction with decorative filigree for cutting, serving and keeping after the day.", "description": "Give the cake cutting a little practical thought\n\nThe cake is booked, the table is planned, and someone asks who is bringing the knife. It is a small detail, but one worth settling before the reception. A matching cake knife and server gives you a pair of utensils for the first cut and for moving that first portion onto a plate.\n\nThis silver wedding cake knife and server set includes two pieces with etched filigree decoration and a shiny finish. The knife measures 13.5 inches long, while the server measures 11.5 inches. It is an option for couples who want decorative serving utensils they can keep using after the wedding.\n\nChoosing a set is not only about how it looks beside the cake. Length, handling, serving arrangements and delivery timing all matter. A few checks now can help you avoid a last-minute search for utensils on the day.\n\nWhat the two pieces do\n\nThe knife and server have separate jobs. The knife cuts the portion, while the server supports it during the move to a plate. Having both means you do not need to use the knife blade as a lifting tool.\n\nFor the first slice, ask your cake maker or caterer where to cut. Wedding cakes can contain boards, dowels and other supports that are not visible from the outside. This set is intended for cake and pie, not for cutting through structural parts.\n\nOnce the portion is free, slide the server underneath and move it carefully. How well a slice holds together also depends on the cake's texture, filling and temperature. No utensil can remove the need for a sensible serving plan, especially with a tall or layered cake.\n\nUnderstand the measurements before ordering\n\nThe knife's listed length is 13.5 inches. That is the overall knife length, not a stated blade-only measurement. The server is 11.5 inches long, but its head width and head length are not provided.\n\nThese differences matter when comparing wedding cake cutting utensils. A long overall measurement does not tell you exactly how much cutting edge is available. Nor does a server's length tell you how wide a slice it will support.\n\nIf you have a large cake, share the listed measurements with your cake maker. Ask whether the set suits the planned first cut and whether the catering team will use separate utensils for the remaining portions.\n\nAlso check the space where the set will sit. A narrow tray or small area beside the cake may need careful planning. The size label is Large, but the actual lengths are the more useful guide.\n\nLook at the materials as well as the colour\n\nThe knife has a 420 stainless steel handle and a 2Cr13 stainless steel blade. The server is made from 304 stainless steel. These are the stated materials for the individual parts.\n\nThe colour is called Ageless Silver. That describes the appearance, not a claim that the utensils are made from solid silver. If you are searching for silver cake serving utensils, it helps to separate the colour you want from the metal specification.\n\nThe set has etched filigree decoration and a shiny finish. Those details give it a more decorative appearance than plain kitchen utensils. No separate coating specification or country of origin is supplied, so those points should not be assumed from the photographs or colour name.\n\nMatch the finish to your table\n\nA silver wedding cake knife can be a useful visual link when the table already includes silver-coloured details. Think about the cake stand, plates and nearby decorations, rather than trying to match every item exactly.\n\nThe filigree adds pattern. If your cake has a lot of decoration, you may want to leave a clear space beside it for the utensils. If the table is quite plain, the etched detail can provide a small point of interest without adding another centrepiece.\n\nBefore ordering, decide where the pair will rest before and after the first cut. Check the listed measurements against that space. Cake, flowers and other styling items are not included, so make separate arrangements for anything else shown in your table plan.\n\nDecorative engraving is not personalisation\n\nThe search term engraved cake server can mean different things. Some shoppers want an existing decorative pattern. Others want names, initials or a wedding date added to the utensil.\n\nThis set has supplied etched filigree decoration. There is no custom engraving or personalisation service offered with the maker's description. Choose it for the design already described, rather than expecting a personalised message.\n\nThat distinction also matters if you are buying a wedding keepsake gift. A matching set can still hold personal meaning because it was used on the day. It does not need to carry a date or names, but the recipient should know what is actually included.\n\nDecide who will use the set\n\nFor some weddings, the couple uses a decorative knife for the first cut, then the caterer takes over. At others, family members help serve the cake. Agree on the plan before the reception rather than leaving the utensils on the table without instructions.\n\nTell the person responsible for the cake that you are bringing a matching cake knife and server. Ask whether they need anything else for portioning and plating. The two-piece set does not replace all the equipment a catering team may need.\n\nThe knife is described as having a sharp blade, so treat it as a kitchen tool, not only a photo prop. Place it where it can be picked up safely. Keep children away from the cutting area and do not leave the blade loose among decorations.\n\nThink about life after the wedding\n\nA wedding cake serving set does not have to be packed away for good after the reception. This pair is also intended for cakes and pies, giving it a role at later celebrations or meals.\n\nThat makes it worth thinking about your usual serving habits. If you often bake or share desserts, a dedicated server may be useful beyond the first slice at your wedding. If you rarely serve cake, the keepsake aspect may matter more to you.\n\nThere is no stated service-life guarantee, and care still matters. Keep the pieces clean, dry and safely stored so they are ready for their next use. Avoid treating a decorative finish as proof that an item needs no maintenance.\n\nBuying it as a gift\n\nGift-ready packaging makes this set an option for a newlywed kitchen gift. It offers something the couple can use during the celebration and keep afterwards.\n\nBefore buying, ask whether they have already arranged cake utensils. Some couples buy their own, while others plan to use equipment supplied by their venue. A quick check can prevent a duplicate gift and helps make sure the style suits their plans.\n\nDo not leave a wedding-day gift purchase too late if the couple needs it for the reception. Allow time for delivery and inspection, then agree on who will take it to the venue. The packaging is described as gift-ready, but its dimensions and detailed presentation are not specified.\n\nClean and store it with care\n\nAfter use, wash the utensils gently with mild detergent and a soft cloth. Rinse them and dry them thoroughly before storage. Avoid abrasive pads and harsh cleaners that may mark the shiny finish or decorative detail.\n\nDishwasher suitability is not specified. Hand washing is the cautious choice unless care information supplied with the product says otherwise. Do not assume that a stainless steel description alone confirms a particular cleaning method.\n\nStore the knife so its sharp edge cannot cause accidental injury. Keep both pieces away from children and avoid loose contact with other utensils that could scratch the finish. If you plan to keep the original packaging, make sure the set is fully dry before putting it away.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checks\n\nWe dispatch within 2 working days. Delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier, within Australia only. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than relying on an arrival close to the event.\n\nWhen the set arrives, check that both pieces are present and inspect them before use. Compare the lengths with your planned tray or cake table space. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether the set is right.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this set if you want a matching stainless steel knife and server with a shiny silver appearance and etched filigree detail. Check the 13.5-inch knife and 11.5-inch server against your cake plans, remembering that blade-only and server-head dimensions are not stated.\n\nConfirm the cutting arrangements with your cake maker, allow plenty of delivery time and inspect the set before use. Then it can take its place beside the cake, with a clear job to do on the day and a place in your kitchen afterwards.", "llm_summary": "This silver wedding cake knife and server set contains two matching utensils with etched filigree decoration and a shiny finish. The listed colour is Ageless Silver and the size is Large. The knife is 13.5 inches long, with a 420 stainless steel handle and a 2Cr13 stainless steel blade. The server is 11.5 inches long and made from 304 stainless steel. Weight is listed as 0.27 kg, with the maker specification also recording 0.6 pounds. Gift-ready packaging is included. Brand, country of origin, blade-only dimensions and dishwasher suitability are not specified by the maker. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by up to 7 working days for tracked courier delivery within Australia only.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/silver-wedding-cake-knife-and-server-set.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper", "sku": "soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper", "title": "Soon To Be Mr and Mrs Acrylic Cake Topper", "slug": "soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper", "price": 45.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "cake-and-toasting", "category_label": "Cake And Toasting", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/main-soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "Black frosted acrylic and Soon To Be Mr and Mrs wording give your cake a clear focal point, with a gift box for presentation.", "description": "A cake detail that says what you are celebrating\n\nAn engagement cake can look lovely and still need something to explain the occasion. You may not want a long message piped across the icing, or you may already have a cake design you do not want to change. A separate topper gives the message its own place.\n\nThe Soon To Be Mr and Mrs Acrylic Cake Topper is one option for that finishing detail. It has fixed wording in black frosted acrylic and comes with a gift box. The message is suited to the time before the wedding, which makes it worth considering for an engagement party, bridal shower or rehearsal dinner.\n\nThe main decision is not just whether you like the words. You also need to check the size, the space on your cake and how the decoration will sit within the whole display. A few checks before ordering can help you avoid a mismatch.\n\nWhat this topper brings to the cake\n\nThis engagement cake topper puts the words Soon To Be Mr and Mrs into the cake arrangement without making them part of the icing. That can be useful when the cake itself has a simple finish or when you want the wording to stand apart from other details.\n\nThe black colour gives you a clear starting point for planning. Think about what will sit behind the lettering, including the cake, wall or table backdrop. A dark background may make black wording harder to read. A lighter background may give it more contrast, depending on the final position and lighting.\n\nThe acrylic has a frosted finish rather than a glossy one. That is a visual choice as much as a material detail. If you are comparing cake decorations, look at the finish as well as the wording so that your choice fits the rest of the setting.\n\nStart with the measurements\n\nThe listed size is 5.9 x 7 inches. The metric dimensions are 15 cm wide and 17.8 cm high, and the acrylic is listed as 2.9 mm thick. These measurements are more useful than judging size from a product image.\n\nMeasure the usable top surface of your cake, not just the widest tier. A cake may have plenty of overall width but less room at the top once other decorations are placed. Share the topper measurements with your cake maker before the design is settled.\n\nThe maker does not give an insertion depth or explain how much of the overall height will remain visible above the cake. It also does not state a minimum cake diameter. Avoid guessing at either point. Your cake maker should check the planned placement against the actual cake.\n\nPlan the layout before adding more decoration\n\nA cake topper needs room around it. That does not mean the cake must be plain, but it helps to decide which detail should draw the eye first. If the message is the main feature, leave enough open space for the letters to be read.\n\nFor engagement cake styling, sketch a rough front view of the cake and mark the topper's width. You do not need drawing skills. A simple outline can show whether the decoration might compete with icing details or other items you already plan to use.\n\nAlso think about the view from the table. Guests may see the cake from a lower angle than the person placing the topper. Ask someone to check the arrangement from that position before the display is finished. Flowers and other accessories are not included with this product.\n\nChoose wording that fits the occasion\n\nSoon To Be Mr and Mrs is a specific message. It suits a couple who want those titles reflected in their celebration, and it points towards a wedding that is still to come. Check both the words and the timing rather than choosing on colour alone.\n\nAs an engagement party cake decoration, the message is a direct match for the event. It can also work as a bridal shower cake topper or rehearsal dinner cake topper when the couple likes the wording.\n\nIf you are considering it for the wedding itself, think about when guests will see the cake. The phrase may feel more fitting before the ceremony than afterwards. That is a personal choice, but it is worth making before the rest of the cake design is built around it.\n\nUnderstand what is fixed and what is not offered\n\nThe topper has fixed Soon To Be Mr and Mrs wording. The maker does not offer added names, a wedding date or an engraving service. If you want those details, do not assume they can be added to this item.\n\nThe source also uses the term monogram cake topper. Here, that description refers to the listed design, not an option to order custom initials. The product information gives one message and one black colour.\n\nThis matters when comparing options. A ready-made message may suit your plans without extra changes. If your cake depends on personalised wording, choose on that basis before committing to the surrounding design.\n\nCheck placement with your cake maker\n\nThe maker describes the acrylic as food safe. No named food-contact certification is provided in the maker's description. If your cake maker or venue needs particular documentation, check that requirement before ordering.\n\nCake structure and icing can affect how a decoration should be placed. The topper's weight is not stated, so there is no basis for promising suitability for every cake type. Give your cake maker the listed dimensions and thickness and ask them to assess the arrangement.\n\nHandle the acrylic gently during placement. Do not bend or force it to make it fit a planned position. Remove it before cutting and serving the cake, then set it aside where it will not be knocked or lost among the serving items.\n\nThink about the venue without assuming outdoor performance\n\nA decoration that looks right on a planning board still needs to suit the actual display space. Check the cake table, backdrop and any nearby objects when deciding how the finished arrangement will look.\n\nNo wind-resistance or outdoor stability information is supplied for this topper. If your event is outside, speak with your venue and cake maker about the full cake setup. Do not treat the material or thickness as proof that the arrangement will cope with outdoor conditions.\n\nThe same practical approach applies indoors. Leave enough space for the cake to be placed and served without catching the topper. It is easier to agree on the display position before the cake arrives than to change it while guests are waiting.\n\nGiving it as an engagement present\n\nA gift boxed cake topper can be a thoughtful option when you know the couple's plans. This item includes one topper and a gift box, so you do not need to source a box just to present it.\n\nBefore choosing it as an engagement gift for couples, check whether they have already ordered their cake decoration. It is also worth confirming that they like the Mr and Mrs wording. A small question now can prevent a duplicate gift or a message that does not suit them.\n\nIf the gift is meant for a particular event, share the dimensions early. The couple or their cake maker will need time to decide whether it fits the planned cake. A cake and other display pieces are not part of the pack.\n\nKeeping it after the celebration\n\nThe maker suggests keeping or framing the topper after the party. That gives it a possible second use as a wedding keepsake decoration rather than something that is put away without a plan.\n\nA frame is not included. Check the 15 cm width, 17.8 cm height and 2.9 mm thickness against the frame's usable space and depth. Do not assume a flat picture frame will have enough room.\n\nClean the topper gently before storage. Use a soft damp cloth, avoid abrasive cleaners and let it dry before placing it in the gift box. Dishwasher suitability is not stated. Handle the lettering with care and avoid packing other items tightly against it.\n\nAllow time for delivery and a decision\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding or celebration date rather than leaving cake details until the last moment.\n\nTime before the event also gives you a chance to check the item against your plans. Keep the packaging while you decide. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging, with return postage paid by you.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. If something is wrong, keep the item and packaging while you arrange help.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this black cake centrepiece if you want fixed Soon To Be Mr and Mrs wording in frosted acrylic, with a gift box included. Compare its measurements with your cake, confirm placement with your cake maker and check that the message suits the occasion.\n\nThen keep the rest of the decision simple. Plan the space around it, allow enough delivery time and handle it gently before and after the celebration.", "llm_summary": "The Soon To Be Mr and Mrs Acrylic Cake Topper is a black frosted acrylic cake decoration with fixed Soon To Be Mr and Mrs wording. One topper is supplied with a gift box. Listed measurements are 5.9 x 7 inches, or 15 cm wide by 17.8 cm high, with a thickness of 2.9 mm. It is described for engagement parties, bridal showers and rehearsal dinners, and can be kept or framed after use. The maker describes the acrylic as food safe. Weight, country of origin, insertion depth and minimum cake size are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only. Unused change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/soon-to-be-mr-and-mrs-acrylic-cake-topper.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece", "sku": "wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece", "title": "Silver Wedding Cake Knife and Toasting Flutes Set", "slug": "wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece", "price": 142.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "cake-and-toasting", "category_label": "Cake And Toasting", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.75 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/main-wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-7.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/cake-and-toasting/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece-8.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two glass flutes, a stainless steel cake knife and a matching server keep both reception moments coordinated.", "description": "Two reception moments, one coordinated set\n\nWedding planning often means keeping track of small things that matter at a particular moment. The cake arrives, but who brought the knife? The speeches are ready, but which glasses are for the couple? Choosing those pieces together helps you plan both parts of the reception without shopping for each item separately.\n\nThis four piece wedding set includes two glass champagne flutes, a cake knife and a pie server. The listed colour is silver. It gives you a coordinated group of items for the toast and cake cutting, while leaving the drinks, cake and wider table setting to your own plans.\n\nStart with what you need rather than how a reception photo looks. If your venue already supplies these items, ask to see them before buying another set. If you want your own matching pieces, check the sizes and arrange who will bring them to the venue.\n\nWhat the four pieces do\n\nThe two flutes are for the couple's toast. Each is 10 inches high, so their height is worth considering when planning the table. There are only two glasses in the pack. Guests' glasses will need to come from your venue, caterer or another source.\n\nThe cake knife measures 13 inches long. It is paired with a 10.5-inch pie server, giving you separate tools for making a slice and moving it onto a plate. Both tools are described as having lightly serrated edges.\n\nA cake knife and pie server can be useful for the planned first slice, but that does not settle every detail of cake service. Ask your caterer how the rest of the cake will be portioned. They may have their own tools and process for serving guests after the couple's cake-cutting moment.\n\nUnderstand the materials before choosing\n\nThe flutes are glass. The cake knife and server are described as rustproof stainless steel. Those are the stated materials, and they are more useful buying details than broad claims about quality.\n\nThe maker does not give a glass composition or a stainless steel grade. It also does not state dishwasher suitability. If any of those details affects your choice, check before ordering rather than assuming the set meets a particular requirement.\n\nFor everyday handling, treat the flutes as breakable glassware and the tools as cutting utensils. Give each piece enough space when washing and storing it. A coordinated appearance does not change the need to handle the glass and edges carefully.\n\nCheck the sizes against your setup\n\nMeasurements matter most when you connect them to the place the set will be used. A 10-inch flute needs room on the table and in any cupboard or transport container you intend to use. Check nearby decorations and make sure the couple can reach the glasses without stretching across other items.\n\nThe knife's 13-inch measurement is its listed overall length. A separate blade length is not provided. Likewise, the server is 10.5 inches long, but its serving surface width is not stated.\n\nIf your cake has an unusual shape or your caterer needs a certain tool size, share these measurements before ordering. The best wedding cake cutting utensils for your plans are ones that meet the actual serving needs, not just the look of the table.\n\nOverall package dimensions and flute capacity are not specified. Do not use the stated height to guess how much a glass holds or how large a storage box you will need.\n\nWho this set may suit\n\nThis set may suit a couple who wants matching wedding reception accessories for both the toast and the first slice. Buying the four pieces together keeps the choice focused. You can then plan the rest of the table around the listed silver colour.\n\nIt may also suit someone buying an engagement gift set or bridal shower gift. Before giving it, ask whether the couple already has these pieces. Some couples use family cake tools, while others choose glasses through their venue.\n\nBirthdays and other celebrations are also listed uses. Think about the number of people taking part, though. Two flutes work for a shared toast between two people, not for drinks service across a whole party.\n\nDecide what a matching set means to you\n\nA silver wedding cake server can sit alongside many different table plans, but matching does not have to mean buying every accessory in the same colour. Start with the items already chosen for your reception and compare the product images with them.\n\nLook at the space around the cake as well as the tools themselves. Plates, napkins and other serving items need their own place. None of those extras comes in this pack.\n\nIf you are choosing bride and groom champagne flutes mainly for photographs, still check their practical use. Ask who will fill them, where they will wait before the toast and who will collect them afterwards. These small decisions help keep the pieces where they are needed.\n\nPlan the toast with your drinks service\n\nThe glass champagne flutes are supplied without drinks. Talk to whoever is handling beverages about what you want served and when. Because capacity is not stated, do not plan precise pours based only on the maker's description.\n\nA wedding toast set also needs a place to wait safely before speeches begin. Avoid leaving the glasses at the edge of a busy table where people are passing plates or moving chairs.\n\nIf the toast and cake cutting happen in different parts of the venue, choose someone to move the pieces. The glasses and cake tools do not need to travel together once they are in use. A clear handover plan is more useful than leaving everyone to guess.\n\nSpeak to your venue about cake service\n\nBefore buying a stainless steel cake knife for the reception, ask your venue what it already provides. You may want this set for the couple's first slice while the caterer uses separate tools for portioning.\n\nExplain that the pack contains one knife and one pie server. It is not a multi-person serving kit. That distinction matters when a large number of guests will be waiting for cake.\n\nAlso ask where the tools should be placed before the cake cutting. Keep edges away from table edges and leave room to pick up each handle without reaching through decorations. For an outdoor celebration, check the venue setup rather than assuming the glasses have any special stability or wind resistance.\n\nGive it with the couple's plans in mind\n\nA practical wedding gift is easier to choose when you know what is still needed. This set covers two glasses and the cake tools, but it does not include gift wrapping, a stated gift box or personalisation.\n\nIf you are buying it as a surprise, avoid arranging engraving on the assumption that this product includes that service. Personalisation is not offered here. The stated contents and measurements should guide the purchase.\n\nYou might also ask whether the couple wants a wedding keepsake set they can keep after the day. That is a personal choice, not a requirement. Some people value having their own reception pieces, while others would rather use what the venue supplies.\n\nClean gently and store with care\n\nDishwasher suitability is not specified, so gentle hand washing is the cautious approach. Use mild detergent, warm water and a soft cloth. Avoid abrasive pads, and take care around the lightly serrated edges.\n\nRinse the pieces and dry them before putting them away. Keep the glasses from knocking together during washing and storage. Avoid sudden temperature changes when handling glassware.\n\nIf you plan to keep the set after the wedding, choose storage that protects each piece. Do not leave the knife loose among the glasses. Keep the original packaging while deciding whether the unused set is right for you, since it is required for a change of mind return.\n\nAllow time for delivery and checking\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than making the reception depend on a last-minute parcel.\n\nWhen it arrives, check that the pack contains two flutes, one knife and one server. Look over the pieces before setting them aside for the event. Early checking gives you time to raise any issue before the day.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, and no separate warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this wedding cake knife set if you need two glass flutes and matching silver cake tools in one pack. Check the 10-inch flute height, 13-inch knife length and 10.5-inch server length against your plans.\n\nConfirm what your venue supplies, allow time for delivery and give someone responsibility for the pieces on the day. The aim is simple: have the glasses ready for the toast and the tools ready for the first slice.", "llm_summary": "This silver wedding cake knife and toasting flutes set contains four pieces. The pack includes two glass champagne flutes, one cake knife and one pie server. Each flute stands 10 inches high. The cake knife measures 13 inches long and the server measures 10.5 inches long. The tools are described as rustproof stainless steel with lightly serrated edges. Listed product weight is 0.75 kg, with maker's details also stating 1.66 pounds. The set is offered for weddings, engagements, bridal showers and other celebrations. Flute capacity, blade lengths, country of origin and overall package dimensions are not specified by the maker. Delivery is available within Australia only, with tracked courier delivery after dispatch.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/wedding-cake-knife-and-toasting-flutes-set-4-piece.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack", "sku": "champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack", "title": "Champagne Satin Chair Sashes, Pack of 50", "slug": "champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack", "price": 183.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack/main-champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "A pack of 50 polyester shiny satin sashes adds a soft colour accent and a tied finish to event seating.", "description": "Give plain seating a shared colour accent\n\nA room can have its tables planned down to the last place card while the chairs still feel separate from the rest of the setting. Chair sashes offer a way to carry your chosen colour through the seating area. They add a fabric detail to the chair backs without requiring a new set of chairs.\n\nThis pack contains 50 champagne satin chair sashes. The listed material is polyester shiny satin, intended for decorative chair ties and bows at weddings, parties and banquet events.\n\nThe main buying questions are practical. Does champagne work with your other decorations? How many chairs need dressing? Is there enough fabric to make the tie you want on your chosen chairs? Settle those points before planning the finished look.\n\nUnderstand what the pack contains\n\nThe stated item count is 50. For a layout using one sash per chair, that gives you enough sashes for 50 chairs. If you want to use more than one on certain chairs, include those extra pieces in your count.\n\nThis is a chair sash pack, not a complete seating decoration set. Chair covers, chairs and other styling accessories are not listed as included. Any covers or matching table decorations need to be chosen separately.\n\nIt helps to write down exactly what you are dressing. You might want every reception chair to match, or you may only want ceremony chair ribbons on selected rows. Both plans start with a chair count rather than a general estimate based on guest numbers.\n\nKeep that list with your other event supplies so someone helping with setup can follow the same plan.\n\nWhat polyester shiny satin means for the look\n\nThe material is listed as polyester shiny satin. That gives you two useful facts: the fibre is polyester, and the finish is shiny satin. It should not be confused with silk.\n\nThe sheen is part of the decorative effect. When comparing fabrics for your event, look at the surface finish as well as the colour. A shiny sash can look different beside a matt chair cover, even when the colours are similar.\n\nTry to view your decorations together under lighting close to what you expect at the event. A colour combination that looks balanced beside a window may read differently under evening lights.\n\nYou do not need every fabric to have the same finish. The useful question is whether the combination looks deliberate when viewed across the seating area.\n\nCheck measurements before choosing a bow\n\nFit is the most important unknown in the maker's description. The listed product dimensions are 7.3D x 36.6W x 19.3H centimetres. They are not clearly identified as the laid-flat measurements of an individual sash.\n\nDo not use those figures as proof that a sash will wrap around your chair. Individual length and width need confirmation before you order for a particular chair style.\n\nMeasure the chair back where you expect the fabric to sit. If a chair cover will be used, allow for that as well. Then consider how much fabric your chosen knot or bow needs beyond the section wrapped around the chair.\n\nA large bow needs a different amount of fabric from a simple tie with short tails. Confirming measurements first is more useful than choosing a bow from a photograph and hoping the proportions will match.\n\nChoose a tie that suits the chair\n\nSatin chair bows are one option, but the finished result depends on the chair shape and usable fabric. The same tie can sit differently on a broad chair back and a narrow one.\n\nOnce you have the pack, test your arrangement on one of the actual chairs before dressing the rest. Check the height of the tie, the size of the loops and where the ends fall. View it from behind and from the aisle.\n\nAlso check how the decoration behaves when someone sits down and stands up. The fabric should remain a decorative detail rather than get in the way of normal chair use.\n\nIf several people are helping, keep one finished chair as a reference. Matching the position and proportions is easier when everyone can see the intended result.\n\nPlan champagne alongside your other colours\n\nChampagne wedding decorations can help link different parts of a room, but the colour name alone does not guarantee a match. Two separately sourced champagne items may have different tones.\n\nCompare these sashes with your chosen linen, chair covers and other decorations in person. A screen image is useful for early planning, but it cannot settle an exact colour match.\n\nYou can also decide how much repetition you want. Dressing every chair creates a different effect from using champagne chair bows only on selected seats.\n\nLook at the seating as a whole rather than judging one sash in isolation. The distance between chairs, the chair colour and the surrounding fabrics all affect how noticeable the decoration feels.\n\nCount ceremony and reception chairs separately\n\nGuest numbers do not always equal the number of sashes needed. You may have separate ceremony and reception chairs, additional seats for other parts of the event, or only a small group of chairs that you want to decorate.\n\nIf you plan to move decorated chairs between spaces, ask the venue whether that is practical. Check who will move them and when. Do not base your order on a transfer that has not been agreed.\n\nFor one sash per chair, a chair sash pack of 50 covers a count of 50. A larger total needs additional packs, while a smaller layout may leave some pieces unused.\n\nMark your count against the seating plan. That simple step gives both the person ordering and the people setting up a clear reference.\n\nWork with the venue before setup\n\nWedding chair sashes need to work with the venue's chairs and rules. Ask what chair style will be supplied and whether you can inspect or measure one before ordering.\n\nCheck whether chair covers are planned. Chair cover sashes sit over another layer of fabric, which can change both the fit and appearance of the tie.\n\nFor an outdoor setting, do not assume wind resistance or weather performance. Neither is specified in the maker's description. Discuss the proposed decoration with the venue and assess the actual setup.\n\nThe same care applies to indoor spaces. Check for rough chair edges or details that could catch the satin before tying anything in place.\n\nGive yourself time to receive and inspect the pack\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by delivery of up to 7 working days by tracked courier within Australia only.\n\nAllow time after delivery to count the sashes, check their condition and compare the colour with your other items. Your event date should not be the first chance to see how the fabric works on the chosen chair.\n\nKeep the original packaging while you decide whether the pack is right. For change of mind returns, the item must be unused and in its original packaging, and the return window is 14 days from delivery.\n\nThe customer pays change of mind return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nCare for the fabric before and after use\n\nCheck any care label supplied with the sashes before cleaning. Do not guess a wash temperature or ironing setting from the word satin alone.\n\nIf cleaning is needed, test the proposed method on a small hidden area first. Follow the supplied guidance before applying heat, including an iron or steamer.\n\nDuring setup and packing, keep the sashes away from rough surfaces and sharp objects. When removing chair ribbon ties, untie them with care rather than pulling hard on the fabric.\n\nFor storage, make sure every piece is fully dry. A clean, dry storage place keeps the pack together and makes it easier to check what you have before a later event.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this pack if you are looking for 50 champagne chair sashes in polyester shiny satin. They provide a fabric accent for wedding, banquet or party seating, with ties or bows arranged during setup.\n\nBefore ordering, confirm the individual sash dimensions and compare them with your chair backs. The listed product dimensions do not establish the usable length and width of each piece.\n\nCount the chairs, check the colour alongside your other decorations and leave time for delivery and inspection. Those practical checks will help you decide whether these champagne satin chair sashes suit the seating plan you have in mind.", "llm_summary": "This product is a pack of 50 champagne satin chair sashes for wedding, party and banquet chair decoration. The listed material is polyester shiny satin. The sashes can be arranged as chair ties or bows, with the result depending on chair shape and available fabric. Listed product dimensions are 7.3D x 36.6W x 19.3H centimetres, but individual sash length and width are not specified by the maker. Weight and country of origin are also not specified. Chair covers and other decorative accessories are not listed as included. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by up to 7 working days for tracked courier delivery within Australia. Unused change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/champagne-satin-chair-sashes-50-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels", "sku": "dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels", "title": "Dusty Pink Four-Panel Backdrop Curtain", "slug": "dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels", "price": 170.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels/main-dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels-3.jpg" ], "description_short": "Four separate satin panels let you adjust the spread and folds to suit your planned display.", "description": "A softer background starts with the right fit\n\nA busy wall or an open space behind a display can distract from the part of a celebration you want people to notice. A fabric backdrop gives that area a more deliberate setting. The practical question is whether you have enough fabric, the right support and enough room to hang it well.\n\nThis dusty pink backdrop curtain set contains four separate panels. It is listed for weddings, birthdays, baby showers and photo displays. You can spread the panels across a support or gather them into a narrower arrangement with more folds.\n\nBefore choosing it for your event, work out what needs to sit in front of it. A display behind a small table has different space needs from a photo area for several people. Start with the space, then decide how the curtains will fit.\n\nHow the four-panel format works\n\nThe set is made up of individual curtains rather than one continuous sheet. That gives you control over where each panel sits and how closely the panels meet. You can place them side by side, overlap their edges or gather them more closely.\n\nThere is a trade-off between width and fullness. Spreading the fabric further gives more coverage but fewer folds. Gathering it creates deeper folds while covering a smaller area. The advertised overall width should not be treated as the finished width of a fully gathered display.\n\nAn adjustable width backdrop is useful when you are still deciding on the arrangement. It does not remove the need to measure. Sketch the planned display and mark where the edges of the curtains should fall before choosing how much gathering you want.\n\nUnderstanding the listed measurements\n\nThe set is described as 20 ft wide by 10 ft high overall. Each panel is listed as 59 inches wide by 120 inches high, with a rounded description of 5 ft by 10 ft. Use care when comparing those figures with an exact-sized frame.\n\nThe product details also contain a separate measurement of 6.1 L x 1.52 W metres. That entry does not clearly explain the same width and height layout. If a close fit matters, confirm the dimensions before ordering rather than assuming all the entries describe the same thing.\n\nMeasure from the intended hanging point to the floor, not just the height of the wall. Then measure the usable width of the support. Consider how much fabric will be taken up by folds and overlap. A ten foot backdrop curtain may be longer than your available hanging height, so plan the bottom edge as well.\n\nWhat the satin description tells you\n\nThe fabric is described as satin with a silky feel and wrinkle resistance. Those details help explain the intended look and texture, but they do not answer every question about performance.\n\nThe maker does not specify fibre composition, fabric weight or opacity. Do not assume that the curtains will fully hide a patterned wall, a window or objects behind them. For a fabric photo background, the result will depend partly on the setting and lighting.\n\nWrinkle resistance also does not mean the panels can never show folds. Give yourself time to unpack and inspect them. Check the care label before trying to remove creases, since ironing and steaming settings are not given by the maker by the maker.\n\nChoosing dusty pink for your display\n\nDusty pink is the stated colour of this set. When planning dusty pink wedding decorations, compare the curtains with the other pieces that will sit nearby. It is easier to judge the whole arrangement when you consider the background and foreground together.\n\nThink about how much of the curtain will be visible. A large display table may cover much of the lower section, while an open photo area will show more of the fabric. This affects where folds, joins and the bottom edge will draw attention.\n\nKeep the backdrop's role clear. It can provide the coloured background while your other items create the main point of interest. Flowers, signs, lighting and other props are not listed as included, so budget and plan for those separately if you want them.\n\nChecking the hanging support\n\nEach panel has a top rod pocket. The listed pocket circumference is 7.8 inches. This measurement describes the distance around the pocket, not a supported rod diameter.\n\nCheck the pocket against your intended pipe or backdrop support before the event. Do not assume that every stand will fit just because it is sold for curtains. The maker's description also does not state the curtain weight, so confirm the support requirements with the support maker.\n\nOnly four fabric panels are listed in the pack. A stand and hanging hardware are not listed as included. Ask the venue what supports are allowed and whether there are restrictions on attaching decorations to walls or other surfaces. Make that decision before planning the final layout.\n\nWhere this backdrop may suit your plans\n\nA satin wedding backdrop can sit behind a ceremony display or form part of a reception arrangement. The useful width will depend on how you gather the panels and what needs to appear in front of them.\n\nFor a baby shower backdrop curtain, measure the area around the planned display rather than the whole room. The same approach works for birthday party drapes. A smaller, well-positioned background may be all your layout needs.\n\nFor photographs, think about the widest group you expect to place in front of the curtains. Check the view from the camera position, including both edges and the floor. This helps you spot gaps that may not be obvious when standing close to the fabric.\n\nChecking venue rules and conditions\n\nThere is no fire rating or certification stated for these curtains. Some venues have rules about fabric decorations, so ask what evidence they require before buying. Do not treat a general event-use description as proof that a product meets a particular venue rule.\n\nOutdoor performance is also not specified. The maker gives no wind resistance or waterproof rating. If your plans involve an outdoor area, discuss the conditions and support arrangement with the venue rather than assuming an indoor-style setup will work there.\n\nKeep entrances, exits and walkways clear when planning the display. Consider nearby furniture and equipment too. A backdrop should fit the room's practical needs as well as its appearance.\n\nA trial setup is worth the time\n\nOnce the panels arrive, check the pack and inspect the fabric. Keep the packaging while you decide whether the item suits your plans. If you may need a change of mind return, remember that the curtains must remain unused and in their original packaging.\n\nWhen you are ready to use them, allow time for a trial arrangement. Check the rod-pocket fit and decide where each panel will sit. Look at the display from the distance guests or a photographer will see it.\n\nTest the planned lighting as well. Since opacity is not stated, check whether anything behind the curtains remains visible. Take a reference photo of the arrangement you choose so the event-day setup is easier to repeat.\n\nCaring for the panels after use\n\nBoth hand washing and machine washing are listed as suitable. The maker does not provide a wash temperature, cycle, detergent type or drying method. Use the care label supplied with the curtains for those details.\n\nKeep the panels clean while hanging and removing them. Clear a clean place to handle the fabric instead of leaving it against other decorations or on a busy floor.\n\nIf you want reusable party curtains, care between events matters. Store the panels clean and dry, away from things that could mark or snag them. Before the next use, inspect their condition and check the hanging arrangement again rather than relying on the previous setup.\n\nDelivery, returns and event timing\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding or party date so you have time for inspection and planning.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nCheck the dimensions and venue rules before ordering. Those checks are especially useful for an event purchase, where a different size or support may affect other parts of your plan.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis four panel backdrop provides dusty pink satin curtains with top rod pockets and listed hand- and machine-washing options. Separate panels let you adjust the spread, but fuller folds mean less width.\n\nMeasure your space, confirm your support and allow time for delivery. If the measurements and venue requirements line up, you can plan the display around what is supplied: four curtain panels, with the rest of the setup arranged separately.", "llm_summary": "This dusty pink backdrop set contains four separate curtain panels for wedding, party and photo displays. The fabric is described as satin, silky and wrinkle resistant. The overall size is listed as 20 ft wide by 10 ft high. Each panel is listed as 59 inches wide by 120 inches high, also described as 5 ft by 10 ft. Gathering or overlapping the panels reduces their display width. Each panel has a top rod pocket with a listed circumference of 7.8 inches. Hand washing and machine washing are both listed as suitable. A stand and decorative accessories are not listed as included. Weight, fibre composition, origin, opacity and fire rating are not specified by the maker.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/dusty-pink-backdrop-curtain-4-panels.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack", "sku": "ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack", "title": "Ivory Artificial Rose Petals 1000 Pack", "slug": "ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack", "price": 17.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.03 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack/main-ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "Arrange 1000 polyester silk petals along an aisle or across tables to bring your chosen spaces together.", "description": "A small detail that needs a little planning\n\nAn aisle or reception table can look unfinished even when the larger decorations are in place. A petal scatter offers a way to add colour without adding another large object to the room. The main questions are practical ones. How much space do you want to cover, how closely should the petals sit, and will the venue allow them?\n\nThis Ivory Artificial Rose Petals 1000 Pack gives you loose petals to arrange where needed. The colour is ivory, and the listed material is polyester silk. They are artificial decorations, not fresh flowers.\n\nBefore buying, think about the exact areas you want to decorate. A light border beside an aisle is a different job from covering its full width. A few reception tables may need a different allocation again. A clear plan helps you use the pack where it will matter most.\n\nWhat comes in the pack\n\nThe pack contains 1000 individual artificial petals. Each is listed as approximately 2 inches by 2 inches, with an irregular shape. No baskets, runners, candles or flowers are included.\n\nThe listed item weight is 0.03 kg. The maker's description also gives dimensions of 17.8 D x 8.4 W x 1.5 H cm. Keep these measurements separate from the individual petal size. They should not be used to judge how large one petal will look on a table.\n\nThe description “polyester silk” refers to the listed material. It does not mean pure silk. If you are choosing between fresh petals and fabric alternatives, this is an important distinction. Buy these for an artificial petal arrangement rather than expecting the texture or scent of fresh roses.\n\nHow a petal scatter works\n\nLoose petals let you control the shape and spacing of a display. You can place them individually for a planned outline or scatter them across an approved surface. A lighter arrangement leaves more of the table or aisle visible. Closer spacing draws more attention to the petals themselves.\n\nStart with a small sample area. Place a few petals, step back and look at the result from the direction guests will approach. This often gives a clearer view than standing directly above them.\n\nIf you are arranging ivory ceremony decorations across several spaces, use the same trial method in each area. A scatter that looks balanced on a small table may look sparse along a broad aisle. There is no single spacing that suits every setting.\n\nUnderstanding the coverage figure\n\nThe listed approximate coverage is 25 square feet when spread evenly. Treat that as a starting point for planning. It does not describe a thick, overlapping layer, and it cannot tell you exactly how your chosen layout will look.\n\nMeasure the space you intend to decorate. For an aisle, decide whether that means the whole surface or only narrow sections along the sides. For tables, measure the part available after place settings and service items are accounted for.\n\nDo not allocate the same petals twice. If some are reserved for a flower girl basket, those pieces are no longer available for table decoration. Write down a rough allowance for each area before deciding how many packs to order.\n\nA trial layout is especially useful when coverage matters more than the piece count. The number 1000 sounds substantial, but the final effect still depends on the space between each petal.\n\nChoosing wedding aisle petals\n\nWedding aisle petals can mark the route through a ceremony space or add detail beside a runner. Before choosing a layout, ask the venue which surfaces can be decorated and whether loose artificial petals are allowed.\n\nCheck whether petals may be placed on the walking route itself. Do not assume that a venue’s approval for fresh petals applies to fabric ones. Some locations have separate rules for indoor rooms, lawns and outdoor paths.\n\nThen consider how guests and staff will move through the area. Agree on where the petals can go and when they should be placed. This is a setup decision to make with the venue, not something to leave until guests arrive.\n\nIf you plan to use aisle runner petals, remember that a runner is not included. Check its measurements separately and test your intended spacing before the event.\n\nUsing petals on tables\n\nWedding table petals can add an ivory detail around a centrepiece or across an open section of table. Begin with the working layout, including plates, glasses and any items the venue needs for service.\n\nKeep loose petals out of food and drinks. Leave enough clear space for guests to use the table without moving decorations aside. A smaller scatter may be more useful than filling every gap.\n\nLook at the arrangement from a seated position as well as from above. This helps you judge whether the petals are adding a detail or competing with the rest of the setting.\n\nFor romantic table decorations, the same approach applies. Choose a defined area, keep practical surfaces clear and use only as many petals as the space needs. Any additional tableware or styling pieces must be arranged separately.\n\nOther celebrations and displays\n\nThe listed uses include proposals, engagements, anniversaries, bridal showers and Valentine’s Day. The pack can be divided between different decorative areas, subject to the rules of the location.\n\nFor proposal decorations, think about who will prepare the space and who will collect the petals afterwards. If the setting belongs to a hotel, restaurant or another host, obtain permission before making plans around a loose scatter.\n\nFor engagement party decorations, identify the areas that guests will actually see. A welcome display and a main table may be more useful places to focus than several small corners.\n\nAnniversary petals or bridal shower petals can be planned in the same way. Choose the purpose of each display first. Then decide how much of the pack to reserve for it.\n\nSeparating petals before setup\n\nThe maker’s separation method is to lightly moisten your fingertips and slide the petals apart one by one. Work gently, particularly where several pieces sit together. Avoid pulling at a whole clump.\n\nAllow time for this before the main setup period. Preparing the petals earlier gives you a chance to check the pieces and try your layout without the pressure of a ceremony start time.\n\nKeep prepared petals in a clean, dry container. If different people are decorating different areas, divide the planned amounts into separate containers and label them by location.\n\nThat simple step can prevent the whole pack from being used on the first table. It also makes the plan easier to follow if someone other than you handles setup.\n\nVenue rules and outdoor use\n\nArtificial petal confetti needs clear approval from the venue. Ask specifically about polyester petals, rather than asking only whether “confetti” is permitted. The material may affect the answer.\n\nWind resistance and suitability for a particular outdoor venue are not stated. Do not rely on loose petals remaining in position outside. Discuss the layout and collection plan with the venue before deciding to use them there.\n\nNo biodegradability claim is provided. Collect every piece after use, and keep petals away from drains and waterways. Nominate someone to check the area once the display is removed.\n\nHeat resistance is also not specified. Keep the petals away from candles, open flames and other heat sources. If your wider decoration plan includes candles, use a separate arrangement that keeps the fabric petals clear.\n\nCare, storage and possible reuse\n\nNo washing instructions are provided, so avoid machine washing. Keeping petals clean during preparation and setup is a better starting point than planning to wash them afterwards.\n\nAfter use, collect them carefully and inspect their condition. Clean, undamaged pieces may be kept for another arrangement. Do not assume that every piece will be suitable for reuse after being scattered across an event space.\n\nStore retained petals dry in a closed container, away from dirt and direct heat. Keep them separate from items that could spill or mark the fabric.\n\nIf you are still deciding whether to keep the pack, preserve its original packaging and leave the item unused. Change of mind returns have different conditions from storing petals after an event.\n\nOrdering around your event date\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than building your setup plan around the last possible arrival day.\n\nAllow time to check the pack and compare the stated petal measurements with your intended arrangement. That also leaves room to prepare and divide the petals before other event tasks take over.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this pack if your plan calls for 1000 ivory polyester silk rose petals. Each petal is approximately 2 inches by 2 inches, with stated coverage of about 25 square feet when spread evenly.\n\nMeasure first, confirm venue permission and decide how the pack will be divided. Prepare the petals before setup, keep them away from heat and arrange collection afterwards. Those practical checks will help you decide whether this pack fits your ceremony or celebration.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 1000 ivory artificial rose petals made from polyester silk. Each petal measures approximately 2 inches by 2 inches and has an irregular shape. Listed product dimensions are 17.8 D x 8.4 W x 1.5 H cm, and the listed item weight is 0.03 kg. Approximate coverage is 25 square feet when the petals are spread evenly. Suggested uses include wedding aisles, tables, flower girl petals, proposals, anniversaries and parties. Petals can be separated by lightly moistening fingertips and sliding pieces apart. Country of origin is not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days followed by up to 7 working days by tracked courier.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/ivory-artificial-rose-petals-1000-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft", "sku": "metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft", "title": "Metal Wedding Arch Backdrop Stand 7.2ft", "slug": "metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft", "price": 133.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "2.7 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/main-metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "A 7.2 x 4 ft metal frame with screw assembly and a base crossbar gives you a starting point for flowers, greenery or fabric.", "description": "Give your ceremony a clear focal point\n\nA ceremony space can feel unfinished even when the seating, aisle and flowers are already planned. You may need something to frame the couple, define a photo area or give decorations a place to sit. A wedding backdrop frame offers a starting point without deciding the whole look for you.\n\nThis metal wedding arch backdrop stand measures 7.2 ft high by 4 ft wide. It is intended as a frame for event decoration, with flowers, greenery and fabric among the suggested styling choices. Those extras are not listed as included.\n\nBefore choosing a frame, think about the space it needs to serve. A backdrop behind a ceremony has different demands from one beside a cake table. The useful question is whether its size, shape and setup needs fit your plan.\n\nStart with the measurements, not the photograph\n\nThe listed height and width are the first things to compare with your venue. Measure the proposed position rather than judging it from a room photograph. Check overhead lights, low branches and anything else that might interfere with the top of the frame.\n\nThe 4 ft width also deserves attention. Think about who will stand in front of it and how much of the backdrop you want visible around them. Flowers or fabric may extend past the frame, so leave extra space for the finished arrangement.\n\nBase depth and internal clearance are not stated. If the frame must fit into a narrow area, ask for those measurements before ordering. Do not treat the listed height and width as a complete floor plan.\n\nAllow room for people to pass without stepping across the base. At a busy event, practical clearance matters as much as the view from the aisle.\n\nUnderstand how the frame works\n\nThis ceremony decoration stand is made from metal tube sections that connect with screws. The component list names an arch tube, straight tube, T-shaped tube and down tube. A crossbar forms part of the base design.\n\nThat description tells you the basic construction, but it does not provide every setup detail. The maker does not state the tool requirements, exact assembly time or the number of each tube type. Check the supplied instructions before beginning.\n\nPlan a trial build before the event. Lay out the parts, compare them with the instructions and check that the connections fit as expected. Keep the packaging while you inspect the item.\n\nThe base crossbar is a construction feature, not a promise about every setting. It does not establish a safe decoration load or prove that the stand can be used in wind.\n\nChoose a position that works for people\n\nA wedding ceremony arch should support the event layout, not get in its way. Look at the position from the entrance, the guest seats and the photographer's likely viewpoint. A frame that looks centred from one angle may appear off to the side from another.\n\nCheck access for the celebrant and anyone taking part in the ceremony. Leave enough room to approach and move away without brushing against decorations. Keep the base out of walking routes wherever possible.\n\nFor an indoor ceremony backdrop, check the ceiling and nearby fixtures as well as the floor. Ask the venue whether it has rules about freestanding decorations or attachment methods.\n\nFor a garden wedding arch, discuss the ground and weather plan with the venue. Outdoor use is mentioned by the maker, but weather resistance and wind limits are not given by the maker. A garden setting alone does not establish that a particular setup is safe.\n\nPlan the decoration before buying extras\n\nIt is easy to collect flowers, fabric and garlands before deciding how they will attach. Start with a simple sketch instead. Mark where the decoration will sit and which parts of the frame will remain visible.\n\nA floral wedding arch can use a small area of flowers rather than covering the whole structure. That may suit your visual plan, but the frame's load limit still needs checking. A small arrangement can be heavy, especially when its supporting materials are included.\n\nGreenery, vines and garlands are also suggested styling choices. Check their total weight and attachment needs, not just their appearance. The maker does not confirm that any particular florist's arrangement will be supported.\n\nAsk your decorator to review the frame details before preparing a finished piece. If the proposed load cannot be confirmed as suitable, change the plan rather than assuming it will work.\n\nThink carefully about fabric and balloons\n\nA fabric backdrop stand can create a different look from an open floral frame. Tulle is mentioned as a styling option here, but a suggested use is not a stated load rating. Heavy curtains should not be treated as interchangeable with lighter fabric.\n\nPlan where the fabric will hang and whether it will trail near feet. Check the arrangement from both sides so loose material does not hide the base or spill into a walkway. Follow the venue's rules for decorations.\n\nIf you want a balloon backdrop stand, work out the attachment method before the event. Balloons and fixing supplies are not listed as included. Their placement also needs to leave the frame connections accessible for inspection.\n\nFor outdoor plans, decorations can change how a setup reacts to air movement. No wind rating is provided for this product. Ask the venue or event professional to assess the full arrangement, not only the bare frame.\n\nConfirm the colour and shape details\n\nThe specifications list Gold and White, but the selected colour attribute is blank. If your plan depends on a white wedding arch, confirm that finish before ordering. The same applies if you are matching a gold wedding arch to other decorations.\n\nColour can matter even when much of the frame will be covered. Exposed sections may be visible through greenery or between folds of fabric. Check the intended finish against the rest of your event pieces.\n\nThe product is described using square backdrop and arch wording. If the exact outline is important to your design, review the product details before purchase. Do not rely on a style name alone to settle a close fit or a detailed decoration plan.\n\nExact metal composition and coating are not specified. Avoid choosing cleaners, adhesives or other treatments based on an assumed finish.\n\nConsider uses beyond the ceremony\n\nThe maker's description also describes photo booth and birthday party uses. A photo booth backdrop frame needs enough space in front for guests and enough distance for the camera view. Check the planned shot before settling on a position.\n\nFor a birthday party backdrop, think about nearby tables and the path guests will take through the room. Decorations should not make the base harder to see or encourage people to walk through the frame.\n\nIf you hope to move the stand between parts of an event, allow time to remove decorations first. Moving a finished arrangement can affect its balance and attachments. Inspect it again after repositioning.\n\nFuture reuse depends on condition. Check the joints, screws and frame sections before each setup rather than assuming that a previous event proves suitability for the next one.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checks\n\nEvent purchases have a firm deadline, so build in time before the wedding date. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by delivery taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Delivery is within Australia only.\n\nOrder well ahead rather than planning around the final possible arrival day. You need time to inspect the frame, confirm the colour and work through a trial setup. A decorator may also need to see it before finishing the arrangement.\n\nWhen it arrives, compare the contents with the supplied instructions. Check the parts and raise any concerns promptly. Keep the original packaging until you have decided whether the item meets your needs.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. Return postage is paid by the customer. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nPack away with the next setup in mind\n\nRemove flowers, fabric and attachment materials before taking the frame apart. Keep the screws together so they do not get lost among other event supplies. Avoid forcing a joint if it does not come apart as expected.\n\nWipe the frame with a soft cloth and dry it before storage. Abrasive cleaners may mark the surface, so keep cleaning gentle. Store the sections where they will stay dry and avoid rubbing against other items.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis metal wedding arch backdrop offers a 7.2 x 4 ft frame, screw-connected sections and a base crossbar. It gives you a starting point for ceremony, party or photo decorations, which must be sourced separately.\n\nMeasure your venue, confirm the finish and check any proposed decoration load before committing. Allow time for delivery and a trial setup. Those checks will tell you more about its fit for your event than a styled photograph alone.", "llm_summary": "This metal wedding arch backdrop stand is listed at 7.2 ft high by 4 ft wide and weighs 2.7 kg. The pack count is one. Tube sections connect with screws, and the base includes a crossbar. Listed components are an arch tube, straight tube, T-shaped tube and down tube. Gold and White appear in the specifications, but the selected colour is not specified by the maker. Flowers, greenery, garlands, vines and tulle are suggested decorations, not included accessories. Exact metal composition, base footprint, load capacity and outdoor ratings are not specified. Delivery is Australia only by tracked courier, with dispatch within 2 working days and delivery then taking up to 7 working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/metal-wedding-arch-backdrop-stand-7-2ft.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack", "sku": "warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack", "title": "Warm White LED Curtain Lights 2 Pack", "slug": "warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack", "price": 79.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack/main-warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two USB-powered curtain lights offer eight lighting modes, remote brightness adjustment and a repeating timer for your backdrop.", "description": "A bare wall or empty backdrop can leave a ceremony space feeling unfinished. Adding more decorations is not always the answer, especially when the space already has flowers, signs or table details. Curtain lights offer another approach: a hanging layer of light rather than another object to place.\n\nThis warm white LED curtain light pack contains two pieces, with USB power, eight modes and remote control. It gives you ways to change the light pattern and brightness without rebuilding the display.\n\nThe right choice still comes down to practical details. Before ordering wedding backdrop lights, check the space, how you will hang them and where the power will come from. A little planning now helps avoid changes close to the wedding date.\n\nWhat curtain lights add to a backdrop\n\nCurtain lights arrange light along hanging strands. That shape suits a backdrop where you want light across an area rather than only along an edge. You might consider them for the wall behind a ceremony setting or as part of a reception display.\n\nWarm white is the listed light colour for this pack. The exact colour temperature is not stated, so do not rely on a precise match with other lights you already own. If matching matters, compare the lights together before the event.\n\nThink about what will sit in front of the backdrop, too. A sign, floral arrangement or furniture may hide some of the strands. Plan the whole scene rather than judging the light curtain on its own.\n\nThe pack does not include a fabric curtain. If your design needs fabric behind or around the lights, arrange that separately.\n\nUnderstanding the listed size and pack count\n\nThe pack contains two curtain light items. The maker gives a size of 9.8 ft wide by 9.8 ft long, but the maker does not clearly explain every pack-level measurement. Confirm how that size applies to each piece before committing to a layout that needs exact coverage.\n\nThe same care applies to the LED count. A total of 300 LEDs is listed, but it is not clear whether that number refers to one curtain or the full pack. Avoid planning around an assumed count.\n\nMeasure the intended display area from side to side and from the hanging point downwards. Include any space you want to leave above the floor or below a sign.\n\nTwo pack curtain lights may be useful when planning separate light areas, but do not assume that the pieces join electrically. Connectable operation is not specified.\n\nPlanning USB power before styling\n\nThese lights use USB power. The maker's description names computers, power banks and other USB devices as possible power sources, and a USB charger is not included.\n\nChoose the power arrangement before deciding on the final backdrop position. A display can look right on a floor plan yet be awkward to power once furniture and guest seating are in place.\n\nThe USB lead length is not stated. Check it before you rely on a distant power point, and ask the venue how cables should be routed. Keep leads away from walkways and places where chairs will be moved.\n\nIf you plan to use a power bank, test it with the lights in advance. The maker does not give capacity requirements or operating time. A power bank being listed as an option does not establish how long your particular model will run the display.\n\nChoosing between the eight lighting modes\n\nThe lights offer eight modes, including constant light and several changing patterns. Listed effects include wave, alternating flash, breathing, chase, slow flash and flash, along with a combination setting.\n\nStart by testing constant light. It gives you a useful reference before you compare the moving patterns. Then try the other modes in the space, rather than choosing only from their names.\n\nFor ceremony backdrop lighting, consider whether a changing pattern could draw attention away from the people speaking. For a reception, you may prefer a more active effect. Neither choice needs to be permanent throughout the event.\n\nAsk about guest needs before selecting flashing effects. Let anyone managing the room know how to change the setting, so the display can be adjusted if needed.\n\nUsing the remote and brightness controls\n\nThe remote has on and off controls, mode selection, brightness adjustment and a timer key. Its stated receiving range is 3 m.\n\nPlan where the person using it will stand. If the control position is farther away, do not assume it will work from there. Test the remote once the backdrop is in place.\n\nAdjustable brightness fairy lights give you a way to compare the display with the rest of the room lighting. Try the brightness controls with the venue lights set as they will be during the event.\n\nThe maker does not state whether a remote battery is supplied. Check this when the pack arrives, not while setting up at the venue. Keep the remote somewhere known and accessible during the celebration.\n\nDeciding whether to use the timer\n\nThe timer cycle is six hours on and eighteen hours off. That can be useful if the display needs a repeated daily lighting period.\n\nFor a single event, compare the timer cycle with your schedule. Think about setup, guest arrival and the end of the reception. Starting the timer during an early setup could mean the six-hour period ends before you want it to.\n\nTimer curtain lights still need a suitable power supply. The timer controls when the lights operate; it does not establish the operating time of a connected power bank.\n\nRead the supplied instructions before setting the cycle. Give the person responsible for packing down a clear explanation of the controls and power connection.\n\nChecking the hanging arrangement\n\nThe maker mentions hooks, but gives conflicting hook quantities. Confirm what is supplied before counting out attachment points or buying other hanging materials.\n\nSpeak with the venue about where decorations can be attached. Some spaces restrict attachments to walls, ceilings or existing curtains. Having lights with hooks does not mean those hooks suit every surface.\n\nThe product weight and hook load limits are not stated. Do not make assumptions about what an existing rail, frame or fitting can carry. Check the proposed arrangement with the venue or the person supplying the backdrop structure.\n\nLeave time for a trial layout. Handle the strands gently as you arrange them, and avoid pulling on the wires to move the display into position.\n\nMatching the lights to the setting\n\nThese warm white wedding lights are worth considering when your plan calls for a hanging light backdrop and you have suitable power and attachment points.\n\nThey need more checking if you require a precise colour match, a known lead length or confirmed electrical linking between pieces. Those details are not given by the maker by the maker.\n\nWeather protection is also not stated. Do not treat the absence of a rating as permission to use them in rain, damp conditions or an exposed outdoor setting. Confirm the instructions before making an outdoor plan.\n\nEven when comparing indoor curtain lights, check the actual installation needs. The room layout, guest routes and available hanging points matter as much as the decorative effect.\n\nTesting a photo backdrop\n\nIf you are choosing photo backdrop lights, test the display with the person taking the photographs. Light that looks pleasing to the eye may appear differently through a camera.\n\nTry the constant mode and a few brightness settings while the room lighting is on. Look at how clearly people, signs and other details show in the frame.\n\nDo not assume one setting will suit both daylight and an evening reception. A quick check at the relevant time of day can help you decide whether an adjustment is needed.\n\nKeep the test practical. Use the intended backdrop position and take a few sample photographs before settling on the settings.\n\nCaring for the lights after the event\n\nDisconnect the USB power before removing or cleaning the lights. Work gently from the hanging points rather than tugging the strands down.\n\nUse a soft, dry cloth for light cleaning. Do not immerse the lights or controls in water. Check wires and connections for damage before putting them away.\n\nLoosely gather the strands so they are easier to separate next time. Keep them dry, and store the remote with the lights.\n\nRetain the original packaging while deciding whether the product suits your plans. Change of mind returns require the item to be unused and in its original packaging.\n\nAllowing time for delivery and checks\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. Allow time to inspect the pack, confirm the contents and ask questions about any unclear measurements before setup day.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery for unused items in their original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis two-piece pack offers warm white LED curtain lighting, USB power, eight modes and remote brightness control. It also has a six-hour-on, eighteen-hour-off timer.\n\nBefore choosing it, confirm the size details, hanging arrangement and power setup. Allow for a separate USB charger and any fabric backdrop, then test the complete display well before guests arrive.", "llm_summary": "This warm white LED curtain light product is supplied as a two-piece pack. The listed materials are copper and plastic, and the lights use USB power. A USB charger and fabric curtain are not included. The maker states a size of 9.8 ft wide by 9.8 ft long and 300 LEDs, but does not clarify whether the LED count applies to each curtain or the pack. Eight lighting modes, remote brightness adjustment and a 3 m remote receiving range are listed. The timer cycle is six hours on and eighteen hours off. Weight, country of origin and weather protection are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with tracked courier delivery after dispatch.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/warm-white-led-curtain-lights-2-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack", "sku": "white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack", "title": "White Artificial Wisteria Garland 4 Pack", "slug": "white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack", "price": 73.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "209 g", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/main-white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "Four white wisteria garlands with hanging flower stems let you plan a draped arrangement around your chosen display.", "description": "Start with the space you want to decorate\n\nA ceremony arch or bare backdrop can need floral detail without needing flowers across every surface. Hanging wisteria gives you a way to frame a space, with flower stems falling below the main garland. The first step is deciding where that frame should begin and end.\n\nThis white artificial wisteria garland pack contains four separate pieces. You can plan them as one grouped display or place them in different areas. They are artificial, so you do not need to organise watering as part of the setup.\n\nThat does not remove the need to measure. A garland that looks generous on a small frame may look sparse across a wide arch. Start with your actual space rather than using the pack count as a guide to coverage.\n\nUnderstand the lengths before you order\n\nEach garland is listed as 7.2 ft / 2.18 m long. Each has 10 flower stems, and each flower stem is listed as 15 inches long. These measurements describe different parts of the decoration, and both matter when you plan a display.\n\nThe main length tells you how far a garland can follow a support before allowing for curves, overlap or loose draping. The flower stem length tells you about the hanging detail below it. Neither measurement is a promise that the pack will cover a particular arch.\n\nMeasure the path you want the vine to take. If it runs around a curve or wraps around a post, measure that route rather than only the straight distance between two points. Leave room for the hanging flowers too, especially near signs, chairs and doorways.\n\nHow the hanging arrangement works\n\nWisteria-style decoration uses a main vine with flower stems hanging from it. In this pack, white flowers sit with green leaves. The flowers and leaves are silk cloth, while the stems are plastic.\n\nThe direction of the main garland affects the final look. A section placed across the top of a frame lets the flower stems hang below it. A piece arranged around a side post gives a different outline. Sketching those positions can help you see where each of the four pieces might go.\n\nThere is no single required layout. You might want a small floral accent at one corner or a more layered section above the ceremony space. Set your plan around the supplied lengths and the support available, not an assumed finished shape.\n\nWho this four-pack may suit\n\nThis pack is worth considering if you want white flower decoration without live-plant care. Listed uses include weddings, parties, table arrangements and home decoration. It gives you four pieces to work with rather than one fixed arrangement.\n\nFor a small ceremony setup, you might focus the flowers on one part of an arch. For a party, you may prefer separate accents around a display. These are layout options to measure and test, not guaranteed uses for every venue.\n\nIt may be less suited to a plan that depends on a stated weather rating or a supplied fixing system. Those details are not given. If your event has strict installation requirements, speak with the venue before choosing your decorations.\n\nChoose fullness as well as coverage\n\nLength and fullness are not the same thing. Placing garlands along a support uses the available length to cover more distance. Overlapping them brings more flower detail into a smaller area.\n\nBefore buying wedding arch decorations, decide which matters more to your plan. A loose floral outline has a different effect from a closely layered top section. Neither approach tells you how many packs to buy until you know the dimensions.\n\nA rough drawing is useful here. Mark where each garland would start and finish, then note the sections where pieces overlap. This makes it easier to spot a gap before ordering. For the best wedding arbour flowers for your setup, fit and layout matter more than pack count alone.\n\nCheck your support and attachment plan\n\nThe pack contains garlands. An arch, hanging rail, clips and ties are not listed as included. Plan these separately and make sure your chosen fixings suit the surface you are decorating.\n\nAsk the venue what you may attach to its structures. Some spaces restrict adhesives, ties or overhead decorations. Getting permission early can save you from changing the arrangement on the day.\n\nThe listed item weight is 209 g, but that is not a load limit or an installation approval. A separate weight per garland is not given by the maker. Do not use the product weight alone to judge whether a support is safe, particularly for anything placed above people.\n\nKeep the hanging flowers out of access routes. Check the arrangement from seated height as well as standing height, and make sure it does not hide signs or interfere with doors.\n\nPlan table and backdrop displays with care\n\nA wedding table garland needs a different layout from an arch arrangement. On a table, consider how much space remains for place settings, serving items and anything else you intend to use. The garland should not make the table harder to use.\n\nIf you plan to let flowers fall over the edge, check where chairs and feet will be. Keep stems away from places where guests could catch them as they sit or stand.\n\nFor a hanging floral backdrop, measure the visible area and decide how much of it you want covered. Four pieces do not come with a stated backdrop width or height. You will also need a separate support and a suitable attachment plan. Other display items are not included unless listed in the pack contents.\n\nBe cautious about outdoor conditions\n\nOutdoor ceremony decoration is among the listed uses, but the maker does not provide waterproof, UV or wind ratings. That distinction matters when you are planning an exposed display.\n\nDo not treat the word artificial as a weather guarantee. Before using hanging wisteria flowers outdoors, consider the forecast, the location and your venue's advice. Have a plan for changing the display if conditions are unsuitable.\n\nA trial setup can help you check the arrangement, but it cannot establish a weather rating. If your ceremony depends on decorations staying outside for a long period, ask about any missing specifications before placing your order. Avoid making the whole layout depend on an unconfirmed feature.\n\nUnpack gently and allow time to arrange\n\nGive yourself time to look through the pack before the event. Check that the four garlands match your order, then lay them out where the flower stems will not be stepped on or caught.\n\nSeparate the hanging sections gently. Hold the main stem while arranging nearby flowers rather than pulling on individual petals or leaves. Cutting instructions are not provided, so plan around the supplied lengths instead of assuming you can trim them.\n\nTry the layout before the final installation where possible. This can show whether you prefer the pieces spread out or grouped more closely. It also gives you time to adjust your fixing plan without working around guests or other event tasks.\n\nKeep care simple\n\nArtificial flowers do not need watering, but they can collect dust. Use a soft, dry cloth and a gentle touch. Avoid pulling at the joins as you clean around the flowers and foliage.\n\nDetailed washing instructions are not given by the maker. Do not assume the garlands can be soaked or machine washed. Harsh cleaning products are also best avoided, and any cleaning method should first be tested on a hidden area.\n\nKeep the decorations clear of flames and heat sources. No fire rating is stated. After use, store them dry with enough space to avoid crushing the flowers. Loosely arranging the lengths in storage can also make them easier to unpack next time.\n\nAllow time for delivery and checks\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than leaving the delivery window close to setup day.\n\nThat extra time lets you check the contents and compare the garlands with your planned display. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether the product suits your needs.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, so contact us if there is a problem with your order.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis pack gives you four white artificial wisteria garlands, each listed as 7.2 ft / 2.18 m long with 10 hanging flower stems. The silk cloth flowers and leaves sit on plastic stems, and no watering is needed.\n\nChoose it by comparing those measurements with your display, allowing for drape and overlap. Arrange suitable supports and fixings separately, check venue rules, and do not assume weather protection. A measured plan will help you decide whether this four-pack provides the floral detail you want.", "llm_summary": "This product is a pack of four white artificial wisteria garlands for floral decoration. Each garland is listed as 7.2 ft / 2.18 m long, with 10 flower stems per garland and a listed flower stem length of 15 inches. The flowers and leaves are silk cloth, and the stems are plastic. The listed item weight is 209 g. Suggested uses include wedding arches, hanging displays, parties and home decoration. Support structures and fixings are not listed as included. Overall display dimensions, country of origin and outdoor weather ratings are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days followed by up to seven working days by tracked courier.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-artificial-wisteria-garland-4-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels", "sku": "white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels", "title": "White Sheer Backdrop Curtains, 2 Panels", "slug": "white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels", "price": 56.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "ceremony-decorations", "category_label": "Ceremony Decorations", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/main-white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/ceremony-decorations/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two extra-long polyester panels filter light and give you room to arrange loose folds around your backdrop.", "description": "A softer backdrop starts with the right measurements\n\nA ceremony space can have the right layout but still need a softer background. There may be a bare wall behind the couple, a window that draws the eye, or a display area that needs a little definition. White sheer backdrop curtains offer a light fabric layer without turning the setting into a solid wall.\n\nThe key is knowing what sheer fabric can and cannot do. It lets light through, and it can leave objects behind it visible. That makes it worth checking the whole scene, not just the curtains, before deciding whether this style suits your plans.\n\nThis set contains two white polyester panels, each listed at 149.9 cm wide and 365.8 cm long. Start with those figures, then think about the height, width and folds you want.\n\nWhat comes in the pack\n\nThe listed contents are two curtain panels. A backdrop stand, curtain rods and decorative accessories are not listed as part of the set. If your plan includes flowers, lighting or other decorations, arrange those separately.\n\nThe fabric is described as sheer voile made from polyester. White is the colour for this product. Although the maker information mentions a wider range, the maker's description covers only the white pair in the stated size.\n\nKeeping the pack contents clear helps with both budgeting and setup. Before ordering, work out what support you already have and what else the arrangement will need. Two panels are the fabric part of a display, not a complete freestanding backdrop system.\n\nHow sheer fabric changes the view\n\nSheer wedding backdrop drapes allow light to pass through instead of blocking it completely. The result depends partly on what is behind them. A plain wall and a bright window will give the same fabric different appearances.\n\nFor that reason, think about the view from where guests will sit and where photographs will be taken. A sign, doorway or strong colour behind the fabric may still draw attention. Sheer panels should not be chosen on the assumption that they will hide an unwanted feature.\n\nIf you are considering white photo backdrop curtains, test the arrangement under the lighting you expect to use. Look through a camera as well as with your own eyes. The purpose is to check background visibility before the event, while there is still time to adjust your plan.\n\nMeasure the drop before choosing the look\n\nEach panel has a listed length of 365.8 cm. The product details also give a rounded length of 3.66 metres. This is an extra-long drop, so measure from the intended hanging point rather than relying on a room's general ceiling height.\n\nDecide where you want the lower edge to finish. If the hanging point is lower than the fabric length, there will be excess material to account for. Do not leave that decision until setup, especially where guests or staff need to walk nearby.\n\nLong white wedding curtains can suit a tall visual arrangement, but length alone does not tell you whether a set will fit. The support, floor space and venue rules all matter. Mark the intended position and compare it with the listed measurements before you buy.\n\nAllow width for folds\n\nPanel width and finished backdrop width are different things. A panel spread flat covers more width than the same panel drawn into folds. More gathering means less sideways coverage.\n\nEach panel is listed as 149.9 cm wide. The maker text also contains conflicting combined-width figures, so those totals should not guide a close-fitting installation. Use the individual panel dimensions as your starting point and confirm any measurement that is critical to your plan.\n\nThink about the appearance you want. You might place one panel on either side of an opening, or bring the pair together across a narrower area. Sketch the arrangement and leave room for folds rather than stretching your plan to the full flat width.\n\nCheck the rod pockets and support\n\nThese rod pocket sheer curtains have pockets described at the top and bottom. The stated fit is for rods no wider than 1 inch. Check the actual dimensions of your rod rather than assuming any curtain pole will fit.\n\nThe pocket size does not establish what a stand can safely hold. The maker does not give a panel weight, a support load limit or an installation rating. Ask the support maker or venue to confirm the proposed arrangement where needed.\n\nPlan how the panels will be fitted before the event. Check access to the hanging point, who is responsible for setup and whether the venue permits your chosen fixings. Avoid making changes to a venue's fittings without permission.\n\nMatch the curtains to the setting\n\nWedding ceremony curtains need to work with the room, not just with the colour scheme. Look at the wall behind them, nearby doors and any routes used by guests. Fabric should not interfere with access or hide important signs.\n\nFor church wedding drapes, ask about decoration rules before ordering. A venue may have its own requirements for fabric, placement and installation. A fire rating is not specified for these panels, so do not assume they meet a venue's requirements.\n\nOutdoor use is mentioned in the maker information, but no wind resistance or weather rating is provided. That is not a promise of suitability for an outdoor ceremony. Discuss the location and support with your venue and have a plan that does not depend on unverified performance.\n\nConsider uses beyond the ceremony\n\nThe listed applications include anniversary displays and home curtain arrangements. If you expect to reuse the pair, take measurements for the second setting as well. A backdrop that fits an event space may have too much length for a window at home.\n\nAs living room sheer curtains, the panels offer a translucent layer rather than a blackout covering. They allow light through, so they should not be treated as a way to darken a room. Privacy also needs checking under the actual indoor and outdoor lighting conditions.\n\nCanopy bed drapes are another listed use. Check the canopy's arrangement and the fabric length before planning that setup. Keep loose fabric clear of heat sources and places where it could catch or obstruct movement.\n\nPlan the rest of the display separately\n\nA white fabric background leaves room for your own styling choices, but those choices need their own checks. Do not assume the curtain panels can support flowers, signs or lighting. No capacity for holding added decorations is stated.\n\nIf you want a simple arrangement, focus first on the fabric drop and the spacing between panels. See how it looks before adding anything else. This can help you decide whether more decoration is needed at all.\n\nFor anniversary backdrop curtains or a ceremony display, keep practical access in mind. Someone may need to reach a doorway, move a chair or adjust equipment behind the scene. Leave enough room for those tasks instead of treating the backdrop as a flat drawing.\n\nPrepare and care for the panels\n\nAllow time before the event to check the panels and read the supplied care instructions. Compare the contents with your order and assess the fabric before making it part of a larger setup.\n\nThe stated washing method is a cold machine wash on a gentle cycle with like colours. Only non-chlorine bleach should be used when needed. Tumble dry on low and remove promptly.\n\nA cool iron may be used as needed. Plan this preparation before travelling to the venue rather than assuming ironing space will be available there. After use, make sure the panels are clean and fully dry before folding them for storage.\n\nCareful packing also makes the next setup easier. Keep the fabric away from damp items, sharp fixings and anything that could mark the white surface.\n\nLeave time for delivery and fit checks\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding date so you have time to check the contents and fit.\n\nKeep the original packaging while you decide whether the set meets your needs. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. If something is wrong on arrival, contact us with the details rather than leaving the issue until the day of the event.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis two panel curtain set provides white sheer polyester fabric with a listed size of 149.9 cm wide by 365.8 cm long per panel. It suits plans that call for a translucent fabric layer, not a solid screen.\n\nMeasure the hanging space, allow width for folds and check the rod size. Confirm venue requirements and arrange supports separately. With those decisions made first, you can judge whether these extra long sheer curtains are the right fit for your setting.", "llm_summary": "This product is a two-panel set of white sheer polyester curtains for backdrop and curtain arrangements. Each panel is listed as 149.9 cm wide by 365.8 cm long, with product dimensions also recorded as 3.66 m long by 1.5 m wide. The translucent voile fabric lets light pass through. Top and bottom rod pockets are described as fitting rods no wider than 1 inch. Suggested uses include weddings, anniversaries, windows and canopy arrangements, subject to fit and setting checks. Care instructions allow cold gentle machine washing, low tumble drying and cool ironing. Weight, country of origin and fire rating are not specified by the maker. The listed contents are two curtain panels, not a backdrop stand or decorative accessories.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-sheer-backdrop-curtains-2-panels.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid", "sku": "acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid", "title": "Acacia Wood Cake Stand with Dome Lid", "slug": "acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid", "price": 119.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.45 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid/main-acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "A clear acrylic cover and removable pedestal let you switch between a raised cake display and a wooden serving plate.", "description": "A cake can look ready to serve long before everyone is ready to eat. You may want to leave it on display while you finish setting the table, or keep a few baked treats together between servings. A covered stand gives those foods a place without hiding them from view.\n\nThis acacia wood cake stand with dome lid combines a brown wooden plate with a clear acrylic cover. Its pedestal foot is removable, so you can choose a raised display or a lower serving tray. Before buying, it is worth looking beyond the overall appearance. Fit, cleaning and the way you plan to serve all matter.\n\nWhat the stand brings to your table\n\nThe main parts have separate jobs. The wooden plate holds the food, the pedestal raises it, and the clear dome lets you see what is underneath. A recessed lip gives the cover a defined place to sit on the plate.\n\nThat arrangement can be useful for afternoon tea or a dessert table where you want to keep baking covered until serving. You can lift the lid to offer a slice, then replace it afterwards.\n\nThe cover should not be treated as an airtight seal. No tested freshness period is provided, and different foods need different storage conditions. A cake stand with cover is servingware, not a substitute for the storage instructions for cream, custard or other perishable ingredients.\n\nAcacia wood below, acrylic above\n\nThe material pairing is straightforward. The stand is acacia wood in a brown finish, while the dome is clear acrylic. This gives the plate a warmer appearance than an all-clear design while leaving the food visible.\n\nIf you are comparing an acrylic dome cake stand with a glass model, make sure you know which material you are choosing. This cover is not glass. It still needs careful handling, and its clear surface benefits from soft cloths rather than abrasive cleaning tools.\n\nThe maker does not state the type of finish applied to the wood. It also does not give a country of origin or any certification. Those details should not be assumed from the appearance or the material name.\n\nCheck cake clearance, not just overall size\n\nThe listed overall dimensions are 29.2 x 29.2 x 24.9 cm. These measurements help you judge the space the complete item will take up on a table or shelf. They do not tell you the largest cake that will fit inside.\n\nPart of the overall height belongs to the pedestal and plate. The dome also curves, so a tall decoration near the edge may need more room than one in the centre. Internal dome height and usable plate diameter are not specified.\n\nMeasure the finished dessert, including icing, fruit, flowers or a topper. Allow room around it so you can lower the cover without brushing the sides. If the fit is close, ask for confirmed internal measurements before ordering. Do not treat the external width as a guaranteed cake capacity.\n\nRaised stand or lower serving tray?\n\nA removable pedestal cake stand gives you a choice in how you present food. With the foot attached, the plate sits above the table. This may suit a cake that you want to separate visually from nearby dishes.\n\nWith the foot removed, the wooden plate can serve as a tray. The listed uses include charcuterie, cupcakes, cake pops, cookies and bread. You can use the cover where the food arrangement leaves enough clearance.\n\nThink about how guests will reach the food. A display that looks good from across the room still needs to be practical at serving time. Leave space beside the stand for the removed dome, and avoid placing it where a guest must reach over other dishes to lift the lid.\n\nChoosing food for the plate\n\nA wooden cake plate can be useful beyond a single celebration cake. Cookies, small cakes and bread are all listed uses, so the stand may have a place in regular serving as well as occasional events.\n\nThere is no stated portion count. A cupcake serving plate holds different numbers depending on the size of the paper cases and the width of the icing. The same applies to cookies, rolls and slices.\n\nTry a simple layout on a measured surface before planning a full spread. Leave room between pieces for fingers or serving tools. If you intend to use the dome, keep the food within its clearance rather than filling every visible part of the wooden plate.\n\nPlanning a wedding dessert table\n\nFor a wedding dessert table stand, start with the table plan rather than the decoration theme. Check the footprint, the space needed to lift the dome, and where the lid will go during service. These small details affect how easy the display is to use.\n\nThe brown wood and clear cover can be considered alongside your other serving pieces. You do not need to match every material, but it helps to look at the whole arrangement before buying individual items.\n\nNo load limit is stated. Do not assume this stand is suitable for a heavy tiered cake. Discuss the cake's weight and dimensions with your baker, and confirm the stand's suitability before making it part of the final plan. Order well ahead of the wedding date so you have time to check it.\n\nGive the stand a sensible position\n\nThe product details describe a pad beneath the base intended to reduce sliding. That is a useful design detail, but it is not a promise that the stand cannot move or tip.\n\nChoose a level surface with enough room around it. Keep it away from table edges, loose cloth folds and places where bags or sleeves might catch it. Check the arrangement before adding food.\n\nNo wind-resistance or outdoor-use rating is provided. If your event is outside, consider the actual conditions rather than relying on the dome to make the setup secure. The acrylic cover also does not make the item childproof. Adults should supervise serving where children are present.\n\nUse the cover with food safety in mind\n\nA clear dome makes it easy to see what is available without lifting it every time. That is helpful when you are deciding whether to serve another slice or bring out more baking.\n\nIt does not change the needs of the food underneath. A bread serving plate and a plate holding cream-filled cakes call for different storage decisions. Follow the recipe, packaging or food safety advice for the ingredients you use.\n\nRefrigerator suitability is not stated, nor is suitability for an oven or microwave. Plan to use the stand for presentation and serving. If food needs chilled storage, use an appropriate container rather than assuming the complete stand belongs in the fridge.\n\nGentle cleaning is part of the choice\n\nBoth the wood and acrylic need hand cleaning. Neither belongs in a dishwasher. If dishwasher cleaning is a firm requirement for your servingware, this is an important point to consider before ordering.\n\nFor routine care, wipe gently with a damp cloth. Avoid soaking the wooden parts and dry them after cleaning. Use a soft cloth on the dome and avoid abrasive cleaners that could mark its surface.\n\nCleaning promptly after serving can make the job easier than leaving food residue to dry. Once the parts are clean and dry, store them where the dome will not rub against rough objects. The care routine is simple, but it does need a little more attention than dishwasher-safe tableware.\n\nBuying it for someone else\n\nA cake stand gift may suit someone who bakes, hosts afternoon tea or enjoys arranging food for guests. The removable foot offers another serving option without needing a separate plate design.\n\nCheck practical details before choosing it as a gift. The recipient needs room to store an item with the listed overall dimensions, and they should be happy to wash it by hand.\n\nThe quantity is one cake stand with dome lid. Food, flowers and other table decorations are not included. Gift packaging is not specified, so plan any wrapping separately rather than assuming it will arrive ready to present.\n\nDelivery and returns before an event\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Leave plenty of time before a wedding or other fixed-date event.\n\nWhen it arrives, check the item before using it. Compare it with your table plan and confirm that your intended dessert will fit. Keep the packaging while you make that decision.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. No separate warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this covered cake plate if you want an acacia wood stand, a clear acrylic dome and the option to remove the pedestal foot. It offers a way to display cakes or serve other listed foods in a lower tray arrangement.\n\nThe key checks are internal cake clearance, table space and hand-cleaning needs. Overall dimensions alone do not establish cake capacity, and no weight limit is stated. Confirm those details where they matter, then allow enough delivery time to inspect the stand before your event.", "llm_summary": "This acacia wood cake stand has a clear acrylic dome and a brown wooden stand. Its removable pedestal foot allows the plate to be used as a serving tray. Listed uses include cakes, cupcakes, cake pops, cookies, bread and charcuterie. The dome rests in a recessed lip, and the base has a pad intended to reduce sliding. Overall dimensions are 29.2 x 29.2 x 24.9 cm. The recorded weight is 0.45 kg, with the maker also listing 1 lb. The unit count is one. Internal dome clearance, usable plate diameter and load capacity are not specified by the maker. The wood and acrylic require gentle hand cleaning and are not dishwasher safe. No brand or country of origin is specified.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/acacia-wood-cake-stand-with-dome-lid.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack", "sku": "battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack", "title": "Warm White Copper Wire Fairy Lights 24 Pack", "slug": "battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack", "price": 36.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack/main-battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack.jpg" ], "description_short": "Shape battery-powered copper wire around your table decorations and choose from three lighting modes.", "description": "Small lights without a mains lead at every table\n\nA table can look finished in daylight but feel quite different once the room lights go down. You might want a little light around a vase, through a garland or beside a place setting without running power leads across the floor.\n\nBattery operated table lights give you a way to add those small points of light. This pack contains 24 separate strings, so you can plan individual displays rather than work around one long connected length.\n\nThe important part is matching the lights to the scale of your decorations. Each string here is 1 metre long with 10 warm white LEDs. That makes the measurements worth checking before you decide how many tables a pack will cover.\n\nWhat comes in the pack\n\nYou receive 24 copper wire fairy light strings. Each has its own battery case with three pre-installed LR44 button batteries. The light colour is warm white, and the strings use LED light sources.\n\nThere are no jars, flowers, bottles or other styling props included. If your plan includes a vase arrangement or a line of decorated bottles, allow for those items separately.\n\nThe wire is insulated and bendable. You can shape it around a decoration rather than leave it in a straight line. The maker's description also describes the wire as staying cool to the touch during use.\n\nWeight and battery case measurements are not given by the maker. Those missing details matter if you want to tuck a case into a small holder or place the lights on a delicate display.\n\nHow the lighting modes change the display\n\nThese warm white fairy lights offer steady on, fast flashing and slow flashing modes. Steady on gives a constant light, which is a useful starting point when testing a dinner table arrangement.\n\nFlashing changes how the decoration draws attention. Before choosing it for a reception, try the mode in a room with similar lighting and think about the people who will sit nearby. A setting that works on a party display may feel distracting beside a dinner plate.\n\nKeep the venue informed about your plan. Its rules and your guests' needs should guide the choice, not just how the display looks in a quick photo.\n\nCheck the length around the decoration\n\nA 1 metre string does not necessarily cover a 1 metre-wide arrangement. Wrapping wire around a jar or winding it through a wreath uses length with every turn.\n\nA simple way to plan is to use a piece of ordinary string cut to 1 metre. Lay it along the route you want the lights to follow. Leave room for the battery case to sit somewhere dry and accessible.\n\nThis trial helps with mason jar fairy lights, but it is just as useful for garlands and bottles. You may find that a loose shape works better than several tight wraps.\n\nDo not assume one string will cover every centrepiece. Table size, the number of decorative pieces and the path of the wire all affect how many you need.\n\nPlan the pack around your table layout\n\nStart with the arrangements rather than the number of tables. A table with one small vase may need a different lighting plan from a long table with several separate decorations.\n\nSketch where each string will sit and count the individual displays. The pack has 24 strings, but that does not mean it must be used across 24 tables. Some arrangements may use more than one, while others may not need lights at all.\n\nIf you are choosing wedding centrepiece lights before finalising the flowers, share the string length with whoever is assembling the displays. They can leave space for the wire and a dry place for the case.\n\nKeep serving areas and guest space in mind too. Decorations should not make it awkward to reach a glass, move a plate or read a place card.\n\nChoose a place for the battery case\n\nBattery power removes the need for a mains connection at each arrangement. It does not remove the need to plan where the battery case goes.\n\nThe case is described as compact, but exact dimensions are not stated. Check those measurements before buying a holder that depends on a close fit. In particular, do not assume it will pass through the neck of a bottle.\n\nFor bottle fairy lights, shaping the wire around the outside may be easier to plan than an enclosed arrangement. For a vase, choose a position that keeps the case separate from water.\n\nAvoid hiding the case so deeply that switching the lights on becomes difficult. Whoever sets up the room should be able to reach it without dismantling the centrepiece or tugging the wire.\n\nKeep moisture away from the case\n\nThe maker says the wire can handle damp décor settings. It also makes clear that the plastic battery case must stay dry.\n\nThat is not the same as a waterproof rating. No rating is provided, and there is no stated permission to submerge the strings. Keep them out of standing water and avoid arrangements that could soak the case.\n\nFresh flowers need particular thought because water can spill during setup or when a vase is moved. Give the lights a separate, dry route rather than letting the battery case rest against a wet container.\n\nOutdoor suitability is not specified either. If your event includes an exposed area, check the conditions and venue requirements before deciding whether these lights suit the plan.\n\nThink about batteries before the event\n\nEach string comes with three LR44 button batteries already installed. The maker describes more than 48 hours of continuous glow under normal use, but performance can vary with battery condition and the selected mode.\n\nTreat that figure as a planning reference rather than a promise for your event. Test the lights before the day and check their brightness again before placing them in the final arrangements.\n\nIf replacement is needed, use the specified battery type and follow the battery compartment instructions. Allow time for this job, especially when preparing several tables.\n\nIt also helps to decide who will switch the lights on and off. A clear setup plan is more useful than discovering, just before guests arrive, that nobody knows where the cases have been tucked.\n\nHandle the wire gently and keep children safe\n\nThe bendable wire lets you make curves and loose wraps. Shape it slowly, supporting the wire instead of pulling from the battery case.\n\nDo not use force to stretch a string around a decoration that is too large. A different route or a separate string is a better option than placing strain on the connection.\n\nButton batteries need careful handling. Keep the lights, battery cases and any loose batteries out of children's reach during setup, use and packing away. These are decorations, not toys.\n\nFor cleaning, switch the lights off and use a soft dry cloth. Do not immerse them. Store each string loosely so the next setup does not begin with tight knots and pulled connections.\n\nWhere these lights fit, and what to check first\n\nShort fairy light strings suit plans built around separate decorative pieces. Suggested uses include jars, wreaths, garlands, bottles, vases and bedroom shelves.\n\nThey are decorative lights, not a stated replacement for room lighting. Brightness in lumens is not given by the maker, so keep your main lighting plan separate.\n\nIf you want one continuous run across a room, check a different lighting format. A connection feature is not listed for these strings, and you should not modify their wiring to join them.\n\nLikewise, do not assume a remote or timer is included. Neither is specified. Choose the product for the features listed, then build a practical setup around them.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checking\n\nDelivery is within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, with delivery then taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. You need time not just for delivery, but also to count the strings, check the lights and try a sample arrangement.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. Return postage is your responsibility. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nRead those conditions before opening and using the pack, particularly if you are still deciding whether the size suits your tables.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis pack gives you 24 separate warm white strings, each 1 metre long with 10 LEDs, battery power and three lighting modes.\n\nMeasure your intended wire route, check where the battery case will sit and keep it dry. With those details settled, you can judge whether these centrepiece string lights fit your decorations and table plan.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 24 warm white, battery-powered copper wire fairy light strings. Each string is 1 metre long with 10 LEDs and three pre-installed LR44 button batteries. Modes are steady on, fast flashing and slow flashing. The insulated wire is bendable for shaping around jars, bottles, vases, wreaths and garlands. The compact plastic battery case must stay dry, including when the wire is used in damp décor settings. The maker states more than 48 hours of continuous glow under normal use, with variation by mode and battery condition. Weight, battery case dimensions, country of origin and waterproof rating are not specified by the maker. Keep the lights and button batteries away from children.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/battery-copper-wire-fairy-lights-24-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10", "sku": "black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10", "title": "Black Arch Acrylic Table Numbers 1 to 10", "slug": "black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10", "price": 95.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/main-black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "Ten black acrylic arch signs with gold lettering and matching acrylic stands bring a consistent look to numbered reception tables.", "description": "Help guests find their table\n\nA seating chart gives guests a table number, but that number still needs to be easy to find in the room. When signs disappear behind flowers or blend into a busy display, guests may need to ask for help just as everyone is taking their seats.\n\nThese black arch acrylic table numbers give tables one to ten a matching set of markers. Each sign has gold lettering, a curved top and an included acrylic stand. The listed sign size is 5 x 7 inches.\n\nChoosing table signs is partly about appearance, but it is also about the way your reception works. Start with your table count, think about how guests will enter the room, then decide where each number should sit. A little planning helps your signs serve a clear purpose alongside the rest of the table décor.\n\nWhat comes in this set\n\nThe pack contains ten numbered acrylic signs, covering one to ten, with acrylic stands. Each sign has protective film on both sides. Remove this film when you are ready to use the signs.\n\nThe colour combination is black with gold lettering. That gives you a clear starting point when comparing the set with your menus, place cards and other reception details. There is no need for every item on the table to match, but it helps to consider them together before buying.\n\nFlowers, candles and other styling items are not included. You will also need a separate way to tell guests which table they have been assigned. The signs mark the tables themselves, rather than replacing a seating chart or individual seating instructions.\n\nCheck your table count first\n\nBefore choosing wedding table numbers, confirm how many guest tables your current plan needs. This set covers ten tables when each table uses one number.\n\nIf you have fewer tables, you can use only the signs you need. Keep the remaining numbers and stands together so they are easy to find if the layout changes. A draft seating plan may shift as guests confirm attendance, so check the final count before the event.\n\nFor more than ten tables, this pack does not supply the full number range. A matching extension set is not specified. Do not assume extra numbers will be available later.\n\nAlso ask whether any tables will use names rather than numbers. A head table or family table might follow a different system, depending on your plan. Make sure your signage agrees with whatever appears on the seating chart.\n\nPicture the size on your table\n\nThe signs are listed as 5 x 7 inches. That is useful information, but it does not describe the whole assembled display. Stand footprint, acrylic thickness and overall assembled dimensions are not stated.\n\nA simple paper template can help you picture the sign size. Cut a piece of paper to the listed measurements and place it near your planned centrepiece. This will not show the stand footprint, but it can help you judge the space taken up by the sign face.\n\nCheck the layout with plates, glasses and any menus in place. A table may look spacious before the place settings arrive and much fuller afterwards. If a missing measurement matters to your plan, confirm it before ordering rather than guessing.\n\nThe aim is to give the number its own visible spot without crowding the setting.\n\nConsider black and gold as part of the whole setting\n\nBlack and gold table numbers can provide a repeated colour detail across a room. The arch outline also adds a curved shape to a table that may already contain rectangular menus or place cards.\n\nLook at your planned table linen and stationery together. Think about whether you want the numbers to stand apart or sit quietly within the wider colour scheme. Both approaches can work as design choices, but the number still needs to be easy for guests to find.\n\nIf you prefer minimalist table numbers, consider how much other detail will surround them. A simple sign can become hard to notice in a crowded display. Leaving some space around it may matter more than adding another decorative item.\n\nThere is no need to build the entire reception around the signs. Treat them as one practical part of the setting.\n\nPlan where guests will look\n\nThink through a guest's route from the seating chart to the table. Which direction will they approach from? Will a chair, flower arrangement or another guest block their view?\n\nThe maker does not state whether these acrylic table number signs have lettering on both sides. Plan with that uncertainty in mind. Do not rely on guests being able to read a number from behind unless you have checked the supplied signs.\n\nFor numbered table centrepieces, position the number where it can be seen without moving decorations. Try the arrangement from a standing guest's viewpoint, not just while seated at the table.\n\nLighting also deserves a check at your venue. Rather than assuming a sign will read the same way everywhere, look at the actual display under the lighting planned for the meal.\n\nCheck the venue and surface\n\nTable numbers with stands provide a way to display the signs, but the included stand does not establish suitability for every surface or setting. Wind resistance and stability in a particular venue are not specified.\n\nIf your reception includes outdoor tables, speak with the venue before ordering. Discuss where signs will sit and what conditions may affect them. Do not assume that an indoor-style table display will behave the same way outside.\n\nEven indoors, test the assembled sign on the surface you plan to use. Check it alongside the table linen and centrepiece arrangement.\n\nWhere the venue team handles setup, give them clear placement notes. A photo of your trial arrangement can be useful, provided it shows the number's position as well as the decorative details.\n\nPrepare the signs before the event\n\nAllow time to open the pack and check the numbers against your seating plan. Confirm that you have the signs and stands needed for each table before handing them to your venue or stylist.\n\nEach sign has protective film on both sides. Peel it away when you are ready to use the signs. Leaving this task until guests are arriving adds a small but avoidable job to a busy moment.\n\nHandle the acrylic gently once the film is removed. Set the signs out in number order and practise placing them in their stands before the event.\n\nIf someone else is arranging the tables, explain which numbers are needed and where they belong. Clear instructions are especially helpful when the room layout does not follow a simple numerical sequence.\n\nLook beyond the wedding day\n\nThe listed uses include bridal showers, engagement parties, anniversaries and birthdays as well as weddings. What matters is whether the event uses numbered seating.\n\nEngagement party table numbers can follow the same basic plan as reception signs. Guests receive a table allocation, then find the matching number in the room. Anniversary table signs can serve that purpose again at a later celebration.\n\nBefore buying for repeated use, think about whether the black and gold colour combination suits your likely events. Also consider whether ten numbers will cover them.\n\nReuse does not mean the signs need no care. Pack them away thoughtfully after each event so the faces are not left rubbing against rough items during transport or storage.\n\nClean and store with care\n\nAcrylic can scratch, so use gentle handling rather than rough cleaning. Wipe with a soft cloth when needed and avoid abrasive pads.\n\nWhen packing away, keep the signs and stands together. Protect the sign faces from contact with objects that could mark them. Keeping the numbers in order also makes the next setup easier.\n\nIf you are considering a change of mind return, check the return terms before using the set. Returns are accepted within fourteen days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. No separate warranty is sold.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checking\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within two working days, and delivery then takes up to seven working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of your wedding date. You need time not only for delivery, but also to inspect the pack and compare the signs with your table layout.\n\nDo not leave that first check until the venue setup. Earlier preparation gives you time to notice a mismatch between your table count and the supplied numbers, or to ask about a measurement that matters to your display.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis set supplies ten black arch acrylic signs with gold lettering, numbered one to ten, with acrylic stands. Each sign is listed as 5 x 7 inches and has protective film on both sides.\n\nChoose it by checking your number range, table space and colour plan. Confirm any missing measurements that matter, arrange the signs where guests can see them, and allow plenty of time before the event.", "llm_summary": "This set contains black arch acrylic table numbers one to ten with gold lettering. There are ten numbered signs with acrylic stands, and each sign is listed as 5 x 7 inches. Protective film covers both sides of each sign and should be removed before use. The set is intended for numbered tables at weddings, bridal showers, engagement parties, anniversaries and birthdays. Weight, acrylic thickness, stand footprint and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days followed by up to seven working days by tracked courier. Unused items in original packaging may be returned for change of mind within fourteen days of delivery, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/black-arch-acrylic-table-numbers-1-to-10.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack", "sku": "clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack", "title": "Clear Glass Votive Candle Holders, Set of 12", "slug": "clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack", "price": 29.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/main-clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "A set of 12 clear glass holders gives you matching pieces to arrange around your table centrepieces.", "description": "Small details that need a little planning\n\nCandle holders can be a small part of a table setting, yet they still need space and thought. Once plates, glasses, flowers and place cards are in position, there may be less room left than you expected. Choosing holders by appearance alone can leave you with candles that do not fit or a layout your venue cannot approve.\n\nThis set contains 12 clear glass votive candle holders. It gives you matching pieces to divide between tables or use in a larger arrangement. Candles and other decorations are separate, so the useful starting point is to check the holder measurements, decide how you want to use them and confirm the rules for your space.\n\nThe clear finish keeps the look simple. It lets the colours of your linen and surrounding decorations remain visible, rather than adding another colour to coordinate.\n\nWhat you get in the set\n\nThe pack contains 12 glass holders in a clear finish. There are no candles, flowers or other styling accessories included. When working out your table budget, allow for those items separately.\n\nA matching votive candle holder set gives you a repeatable detail across a room. You might divide the pieces between several small tables or use them around one central display. The right arrangement depends on your table dimensions and everything else that needs to fit.\n\nStart with the number of positions you want to fill, not just the number of tables. Four holders on each of three tables uses the whole set. Two on each of six tables does the same. These are counting examples, not recommended layouts. Your venue and available space should guide the final placement.\n\nUnderstand the measurements before buying candles\n\nThe listed opening diameter is 1.96 inches. The base diameter is 1.85 inches, and the holder height is 2.55 inches. These are the relevant measurements to compare with your chosen candle.\n\nThe product details also list 17.8 x 15.2 x 6.4 cm. The maker does not explain what those dimensions describe. Do not treat them as the dimensions of one holder or use them to judge candle fit.\n\nAn opening measurement alone does not confirm compatibility. The candle's shape and its instructions matter too. A candle that passes through the opening may still need more clearance than the holder provides. Check with the candle maker if its requirements are unclear.\n\nFor glass tealight holders, it is worth choosing the candle and holder together on paper before ordering either. Note both sets of measurements and keep the candle's use instructions with your event plan.\n\nHow the glass cup fits into a candle display\n\nThe holder provides a glass cup around a suitable candle. The clear sides allow candlelight to remain visible as part of the arrangement. They do not remove the need to follow the candle maker's safety advice.\n\nNo temperature rating or heatproof certification is supplied in the maker's description. Nor is there a stated fit for every tealight, votive or battery-operated candle. Treat those points as things to check, not features to assume.\n\nUse holders on an appropriate, level surface and keep flames away from anything that could catch fire. Never leave burning candles unattended. Allow the glass to cool before handling it, and do not use a holder with a chip or crack.\n\nThese are basic precautions for a candle display. They are just as relevant at a dinner at home as they are at a large reception.\n\nWho this set may suit\n\nClear glass votive holders are worth considering when you want a repeated table detail without adding a strong colour. They can sit within a wedding scheme, a birthday setting or a home display, provided the candle choice and setting are suitable.\n\nThe set of 12 may also help when you are planning several similar arrangements. Matching pieces make it easier to repeat a layout once you have tested it. You still need to measure each type of table, especially if the room has a mix of round and long tables.\n\nIf you are looking for bulk candle holders, compare pack counts carefully. Here, one pack means 12 holders, not 12 complete candle displays. Keep that distinction clear when comparing prices and preparing an event shopping list.\n\nThis set will need more checking if your plan depends on a particular candle size, water capacity or outdoor performance. Those details are not confirmed by the maker.\n\nPlan around the whole table\n\nA centrepiece can look quite different once guests are seated. Before committing to wedding candle centrepieces, map out the table with plates, cutlery and glassware in place. Include water bottles, shared dishes or table numbers if you will use them.\n\nThen mark the possible holder positions. Leave practical room for guests to reach their glasses and for staff to serve. Check the space around each flame against the candle maker's instructions and the venue's requirements.\n\nThink about what happens during the meal as well as how the table looks at the start. Napkins move. Guests set down bags or phones. Flowers may extend beyond the vase. A sensible arrangement accounts for ordinary use rather than relying on every object staying in one exact place.\n\nA trial layout is more useful than guessing from a styled photograph. Measure your own table and take notes so the setup can be repeated.\n\nAsk the venue before settling on open flames\n\nReception table candle holders should be chosen alongside the venue's candle policy. Ask whether open flames are allowed and whether there are rules about enclosure, placement or supervision.\n\nDo not assume a glass holder meets a venue's requirements simply because it surrounds part of a candle. Show the venue the listed measurements and explain which candle you intend to use.\n\nIf open flames are not allowed, you could assess a battery-operated alternative. Its fit is not guaranteed here, so compare the actual dimensions before buying. Batteries and candles are not included with these holders.\n\nFor outdoor events, be especially cautious about assumptions. Wind resistance and outdoor suitability are not specified. A clear cup should not be treated as a windproof enclosure, and the maker's description does not promise suitability for a particular venue.\n\nKeep the styling simple and practical\n\nClear candle cups give you room to choose the surrounding colours yourself. You can keep the holders separate from floral arrangements or position them nearby with the required clearance. Flowers remain a separate purchase.\n\nSimple table centrepieces often begin with fewer objects and enough space around them. Try the main decoration first, then add holder positions only where the table can accommodate them safely. You do not need to use every piece just because it is in the pack.\n\nThe reference listing mentions DIY decoration, but added materials need care. Paper, ribbons, paint and adhesive products have their own limits around heat. Do not add anything that could create a hazard or interfere with safe candle use.\n\nNo personalisation or engraving service is specified. If you want a named or dated table detail, plan that separately from the holders.\n\nClean, check and pack them with care\n\nLet each holder cool fully before moving or cleaning it. Sudden temperature changes can damage glass, so avoid moving hot holders straight into water.\n\nFor routine cleaning, use mild soap and water with a soft cloth. Dishwasher suitability is not stated, making gentle hand washing the cautious choice. Avoid abrasive cleaners that could mark the surface.\n\nIf wax remains inside, follow the candle maker's advice for removing it from glass. Do not scrape with sharp tools or apply direct heat. Check each cleaned holder for chips or cracks before putting it away.\n\nStore the holders dry, with cushioning between pieces so they do not knock together. Keeping the original packaging is also useful if you need to make an eligible change of mind return before use.\n\nAllow time for delivery and checks\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding or event date.\n\nBuild in time to inspect the glass and check your planned candle fit after delivery. Avoid leaving the first full table trial until setup day. An early check gives you time to address a mismatch in your plan.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, and no separate warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis set gives you 12 clear glass candle holders for a coordinated table display. Check the listed opening, base and height against your candle choice, and do not rely on the unexplained centimetre dimensions for individual fit.\n\nConfirm the venue rules, make space around the display and order well ahead. With those checks done, you can choose your separate candles and arrange the holders around the table setting you have planned.", "llm_summary": "This product is a set of 12 clear glass votive candle holders for table decoration. The listed holder opening diameter is 1.96 inches, the base diameter is 1.85 inches, and the height is 2.55 inches. Product details also give dimensions of 17.8 x 15.2 x 6.4 cm, but their scope is not specified by the maker. Candles and other decorative items are not included. Candle size compatibility, weight, country of origin and certifications are not specified. Delivery is available within Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days followed by up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery for unused items in their original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/clear-glass-votive-candle-holders-12-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack", "sku": "gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack", "title": "Gold Foil Table Number Cards, Pack of 12", "slug": "gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack", "price": 59.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "58 g", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack/main-gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "This pack includes cards numbered one to twelve, with a listed size of 18 cm x 11 cm for planning your table display.", "description": "Make the move from seating chart to table easier\n\nA seating chart tells guests where they belong, but they still need to find that table in the room. When table numbers are hard to spot or do not match the plan, guests may have to stop and ask for help. A numbered card gives them a reference as they approach.\n\nThis Gold Foil Table Number Cards 12 Pack contains cards numbered one to twelve. The listed size is 18 cm x 11 cm, and gold is the listed colour. It is a defined set for a numbered table layout, rather than blank cards that need numbers added.\n\nBefore choosing any wedding table number cards, start with your seating plan. The right pack needs to cover your table numbers and work with the way you intend to display them. Appearance matters, but guests also need to be able to find and read the signs.\n\nStart with the number of tables, not guests\n\nYour guest count alone does not tell you how many reception table markers you need. The same number of guests might be seated across different numbers of tables, depending on the venue layout and your arrangements.\n\nCount the tables that will need a number. This pack provides one card for each number from one to twelve. If your plan uses that range, the numbering matches. If you need numbers above twelve, this pack does not include them.\n\nAlso decide whether you want one number card per table or more than one. A second sign on a table would require another copy of the same number. Do not confuse a 12-card pack with twelve copies of a single number.\n\nKeep other tables in mind too. A gift table or cake table may not need a numbered marker at all. Work from the actual seating layout rather than counting every table in the room.\n\nHow the cards work with your seating plan\n\nThe system is simple. Your reception seating plan assigns a guest to a table number, and the matching card identifies that table. The benefit comes from keeping those two pieces of information consistent.\n\nFor example, if a guest is assigned to table six, there should be a card showing six at that table. A last-minute layout change can create confusion if the cards are moved but the seating chart is not updated.\n\nBefore the reception, ask one person to check the chart against the room. They should compare every numbered table, not just count the cards. Twelve cards placed on twelve tables will not help if two table positions have been swapped.\n\nThese are table number cards, not individual place cards. If you want guests to sit in particular seats, plan separate name cards or another seat-level system.\n\nCheck what 18 cm x 11 cm means for your setup\n\nThe listed card size is 18 cm x 11 cm. Use that measurement to judge how much space the card may take within your table display.\n\nA useful planning step is to mark out an 18 cm x 11 cm rectangle on plain paper. Place it beside your planned centrepiece, menus and glasses. This will help you picture the scale, although it will not confirm the product's thickness, finish or display method.\n\nAvoid judging size from a styled photograph alone. Other objects in an image can make a sign appear larger or smaller than expected. Measurements offer a better starting point.\n\nThe listed item weight is 58 g. An individual card weight is not provided, and weight alone does not establish whether a display will remain stable. Check the complete arrangement with your venue before the day.\n\nDecide how you will display each card\n\nThe maker does not specify whether these cards stand on their own. It also does not list holders as included. Plan the support method separately rather than assuming the pack contains everything needed for an upright display.\n\nIf you already own holders, compare their requirements with the listed card size. Thickness is another part of fit, and that measurement is not stated by the maker. A holder that accepts one type of card may not accept another.\n\nAsk about any detail that would change your buying decision before ordering. This is especially useful if your display relies on a narrow slot, a clip or a particular card orientation.\n\nOnce the cards arrive, test the actual combination. Set up a complete place setting nearby so you can see whether the number is hidden by other items. A trial on an empty table can miss problems that appear once everything is in place.\n\nChoose placement from a guest's point of view\n\nA table can look balanced from the seat while being hard to identify from the aisle. When testing wedding table signs, walk towards the table along the route guests are likely to use.\n\nLook for anything that blocks the number. A centrepiece, menu or other decoration may sit between the approaching guest and the card. Moving the sign a short distance could make the table easier to identify without changing the whole arrangement.\n\nThe reverse-side design is not specified. Do not plan on the number being visible from both sides unless you have confirmed that detail.\n\nThink about the room layout as well as the table itself. If people can approach from several directions, ask the venue how they usually position table markers. Their advice can help you test a layout, but it does not replace checking the actual cards and supports.\n\nWork gold detail into the table setting\n\nGold foil table numbers can provide a repeated gold detail across numbered reception tables. That gives you one point of reference when choosing the rest of your table setting.\n\nYou do not need every item to be gold. Consider how the cards will sit beside your existing table linen, stationery and centrepieces. The aim is to make the number easy to pick out while keeping the overall setting comfortable to look at.\n\nExact colour matching with separate gold reception decorations is not confirmed. Different products can have different tones and finishes, so avoid assuming that two items described as gold will match exactly.\n\nOnly the numbered cards are listed in this pack. Flowers, candles, table linen and other styling items need to be planned separately. Keep that distinction clear when setting your decoration budget.\n\nKnow which details still need checking\n\nThe brief gives the number range, pack count, colour, size and listed item weight. It does not state the base material, card thickness or country of origin.\n\nThose gaps matter if your plans depend on a particular construction or finish. For instance, a display slot may need a known thickness. An outdoor arrangement may need weather-related details that are not provided by the maker.\n\nNo waterproof rating, wind resistance or outdoor suitability is stated. Speak with your venue before planning an exposed display, and do not treat gold foil as evidence of weather protection.\n\nThere is also no listed personalisation service. Choose this pack for its stated numbers one to twelve, rather than planning on custom names, wording or extra numbers being supplied.\n\nKeep setup simple for the person helping\n\nThe person placing your numbered table cards may not be the person who created the seating plan. Give them a clear room plan that shows where each numbered table belongs.\n\nStore the cards together until setup, then check the sequence before handing them over. This is an easy time to notice a missing or misplaced number while there is still time to sort out the plan.\n\nIf you change table positions, update the setup instructions too. Avoid relying on a spoken change that only one helper has heard. A clear final plan gives everyone the same reference.\n\nAfter placement, do a last walk-through from the entrance. Read the seating chart, choose a table number and follow the route a guest would take. Repeat from another approach if the room has more than one entry path.\n\nCare for the cards before the event\n\nKeep the cards flat in a dry place before use. Choose a storage spot where other wedding supplies will not bend or crush them.\n\nHandle them with clean, dry hands, especially during a setup that also involves food or flowers. Keep drinks and damp items away from the cards while you arrange the table.\n\nThe material and cleaning requirements are not specified, so avoid soaking them or applying cleaning sprays. Preventing marks is a safer approach than assuming the surface can be washed.\n\nKeep the original packaging while you check the order. If you decide the pack does not suit your plans, unused condition and original packaging are part of the change of mind return requirements.\n\nAllow time to receive and check your order\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. Leave time to open the pack, check the numbers and test the cards with any separate holders. Receiving the order is only one step in getting the table display ready.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this pack if your plan calls for gold table numbers running from one to twelve. Check the listed 18 cm x 11 cm size, confirm how you will support the cards and allow time for a trial setup.\n\nKeep the seating chart and table positions consistent. A well-placed number card has a straightforward job: helping each guest find the table assigned to them.", "llm_summary": "This product is a 12-pack of gold foil table number cards for wedding reception tables. The pack contains cards numbered one to twelve, intended to help guests find the table shown on a seating plan. Gold is the listed colour. The listed size is 18 cm x 11 cm, and the listed item weight is 58 g. The item is new and listed as in stock. Base material, card thickness, country of origin, reverse-side design and holder compatibility are not specified by the maker. Only the numbered cards are listed as pack contents. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days followed by up to seven working days by tracked courier.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-foil-table-number-cards-12-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box", "sku": "gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box", "title": "Gold Geometric Glass Wedding Card Box", "slug": "gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box", "price": 125.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "1.7 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/main-gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "A top slot, lockable side door and included heart-shaped lock help keep guest cards together in a gold house-shaped display.", "description": "Wedding cards can arrive at different times and in different hands. Some guests bring a small envelope, while others carry a larger card with ribbon or a wax seal. Without a clear place to leave them, cards can end up spread across the gift table or handed to someone who is already busy.\n\nA dedicated wedding reception card holder gives those greetings a home. This gold geometric glass box combines a visible collection space with a top slot and a lockable side door. Before choosing it, think about the envelopes you expect, the space available and who will look after the contents.\n\nHow this card box works\n\nGuests place cards through the slot on top. The slot is listed as 16 cm long and intended for standard cards and envelopes. The glass sides let you see what is inside, while the house-shaped outline gives the box a decorative role on the table.\n\nYou access the contents through the side door. A heart-shaped lock with a key is included to close that door. Keep the key with one named person rather than passing it between several helpers during the reception.\n\nThe pack includes one card box and its lock with key. Cards, signs and surrounding decorations are not included. If you want a label explaining where guests should leave their cards, arrange that separately and leave the top slot easy to reach.\n\nCheck the measurements before the styling\n\nThe product details list the box at 25.9 cm long, 15 cm wide and 20.1 cm high. The reference description uses slightly different rounded measurements of about 26 x 15 x 20.3 cm. Allow a little clearance rather than planning a tight-fitting space.\n\nMeasure the usable area of your card table, not just the table itself. A welcome sign, guest book or flower arrangement can reduce the room available. You also need space beside the box to reach the door and above it for guests to post their envelopes.\n\nA paper rectangle measuring 25.9 x 15 cm can help you picture the base on your proposed table. It will not show the full shape, but it gives you a useful starting point. Remember that the height matters if the table sits beneath a shelf or another display.\n\nThe listed weight is 1.7 kg before cards are added. Consider that when deciding who will carry the box to the venue and move it afterwards.\n\nThink about envelopes, not just guest numbers\n\nA common question is how many cards a wedding envelope box can hold. No capacity is stated for this model, so a precise number would be a guess. Thin envelopes take up less room than cards with layered paper, ribbons or other raised details.\n\nThe slot length is useful, but it does not answer every fit question. Slot width is not specified. A card that seems narrow enough may still be awkward to post if it is thick or decorated.\n\nOversized, wax-sealed and ribbon-tied envelopes may need to go in at an angle. They should never be forced through. Ask the person looking after the table to have another way to receive anything that will not fit.\n\nIf you expect many cards, decide in advance whether a trusted person should check the box during the event. That is more reliable than choosing a box from an unstated capacity estimate.\n\nMatch the look to the rest of the table\n\nThe listed gold colour and clear glass make this a visible part of the table arrangement. Unlike an opaque box, a clear glass card holder allows the collected envelopes to become part of the display. Think about whether that suits the look you want as the reception progresses.\n\nThe geometric house shape provides its own outline. You do not need to surround it with lots of objects to explain its purpose. A separate card sign may be enough, particularly if your table also holds a guest book.\n\nWhen choosing a gold reception centrepiece, leave practical space around it. Guests need to find the opening without reaching over fragile decorations. Helpers also need access to the side door without shifting the whole arrangement.\n\nCheck colours against your own table pieces if a close match matters. The listed colour is gold, but there is no detailed finish specification in the maker's description.\n\nUnderstand what the lock does\n\nThis wedding card box with lock includes a heart-shaped lock and key for the side door. That gives you a way to close the access point while cards are being collected. It does not come with a stated security rating.\n\nDo not treat the box as a safe or assume it can be left unattended with money inside. Glass, a lock and a visible display serve a different purpose from rated secure storage.\n\nChoose someone you trust to oversee the cards. Tell them where the key is, when cards should be moved and who will take them home. Make that plan before the reception begins, when everyone has time to listen.\n\nThe top slot remains the way cards enter the box. The presence of a lock does not remove the need for sensible supervision.\n\nWho this design may suit\n\nThis gold wedding card box is worth considering if you want a glass display, a house-shaped design and a separate door for retrieving cards. Its stated uses include weddings, bridal showers, anniversaries and birthday parties.\n\nA bridal shower card box can work as a shared collection point for guests arriving at different times. At an anniversary or birthday celebration, the same box can hold greeting cards without needing a wedding-specific design.\n\nIt may be less suitable if you need a known card capacity, a stated security rating or confirmed weather resistance. Those details are not provided. If one of them is essential to your plan, check before ordering rather than making an assumption.\n\nThe same applies to a very tight table layout. Compare the measurements with the actual space and allow room for use, not just display.\n\nPlan the table from a guest's point of view\n\nPicture arriving with a card in one hand and a bag in the other. The collection point should be easy to recognise and reach. Avoid placing other table pieces directly in front of the slot.\n\nAsk your venue where card collection usually happens and whether a staff member or your own helper will oversee it. Do not assume the venue will take responsibility without a discussion.\n\nFor an outdoor celebration, check the location carefully. Weatherproofing, wind resistance and outdoor performance are not specified for this glass wishing well. A setting that looks sheltered in a photograph may still need a different plan on the day.\n\nAlso consider the end of the event. Decide who will empty the box, who will carry it and where the key will go. A clear handover helps keep the cards together when the room is being packed away.\n\nCare, transport and storage\n\nHandle this as a glass item. Support it from underneath when moving it, and remove loose contents before transport. Avoid carrying it by the lock or treating the door as a handle.\n\nFor general cleaning, empty the box and wipe gently with a soft cloth. Avoid abrasive tools that could mark the surfaces. No detailed cleaning treatment is specified, so keep care simple rather than assuming strong cleaners are suitable.\n\nRetain the original packaging. It is useful for storage, and original packaging is also part of the change of mind return conditions.\n\nAfter the wedding, the box can become a wedding keepsake display or collect cards at another celebration. Check the fit of keepsakes before planning the display, as internal measurements are not stated.\n\nOrder with time to check everything\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than leaving the purchase until the final preparations.\n\nOnce it arrives, check the glass, door, lock and key before putting it away. Compare the box with your table plan and consider whether the envelopes you expect will work with the slot.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this geometric card box for its gold colour, clear glass, top slot and lockable side door. Check the listed 25.9 x 15 x 20.1 cm dimensions and 16 cm slot against your plans.\n\nAllow for awkward envelopes, give someone responsibility for the key and cards, and order early enough to inspect the box. Those practical checks matter more than adding extra decoration to the table.", "llm_summary": "This gold geometric glass wedding card box has a house-shaped design, a top card slot and a lockable side door. A heart-shaped lock with a key is included. Product details list dimensions of 25.9 x 15 x 20.1 cm and a weight of 1.7 kg. The top slot is listed as 16 cm long and intended for standard cards and envelopes. Thick, oversized, wax-sealed or ribbon-tied envelopes may need angled insertion. The pack contains one card box and its lock with key; cards and decorations are not included. Suggested uses include weddings, bridal showers, anniversaries, birthdays and keepsake displays. Card capacity, slot width and a security rating are not specified by the maker.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-geometric-glass-wedding-card-box.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner", "sku": "gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner", "title": "Gold Glitter Mesh Table Runner", "slug": "gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner", "price": 27.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/main-gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "Thin polyester mesh with a metallic gold foil finish can be cut to suit your table decoration plan.", "description": "Add a gold accent without covering the whole table\n\nA table can have all the practical pieces in place and still need a decorative touch. A runner gives you a place to begin, drawing attention along the table without requiring a full change of linen. The choice of texture matters as much as the colour.\n\nThis Gold Glitter Mesh Table Runner uses thin polyester netting with a metallic gold foil finish. It adds an open-textured layer rather than a solid strip of fabric. That makes the surface beneath it part of the finished look.\n\nIt is intended for wedding, birthday and holiday decorations, as well as DIY projects. Before choosing it, think about whether you want visible mesh and a foil shimmer. If you are picturing a thick fabric runner or rows of sewn sequins, this is a different product.\n\nUnderstand the mesh and foil finish\n\nThe construction is worth checking before you plan a whole room around it. This is polyester mesh with gold foil, not a sewn sequin runner. The glitter effect comes from the finish on the netting.\n\nBecause the mesh is open, your table or tablecloth remains part of the colour scheme. A gold mesh table runner should be considered alongside the surface underneath, not chosen in isolation. If you already have your linen, place the materials together before cutting or setting up the room.\n\nThe foil finish is decorative. No heat protection, waterproof performance or fire rating is specified. Use a separate suitable solution where table protection is needed, and keep the mesh away from flames and hot objects.\n\nDecide what job the runner should do\n\nStart with the purpose of the decorated area. A dining table needs room for place settings and serving items. A display table may have a different layout, with the decoration arranged around the objects on show.\n\nA gold centrepiece runner can help define a section of the table, but it does not need to fill every spare space. Leave enough room for the table to work as intended. The gold finish is one part of the setting, rather than a reason to crowd it.\n\nSketch the arrangement before buying. Mark where the runner will sit, where other objects will go and whether any part will hang over an edge. This helps turn a general decorating idea into measurements you can check.\n\nRead the size details with care\n\nThe supplied size is written as 9FTx2. The unit count is written as 198 sq ft. These entries do not give a clear, complete set of dimensions or a confirmed number of pieces.\n\nDo not assume that the second number in the size entry is a width in feet, or that it means two runners. The maker does not explain it. Likewise, an area figure is not a reliable substitute for a pack count.\n\nBefore ordering, confirm the usable length, width and quantity. Then compare those details with the tables at your venue. If several tables need matching sections, check the total requirement rather than relying on one table as a rough guide.\n\nMeasure the layout you actually want\n\nMeasure each type of table you plan to decorate. Tables that look similar in a room can have different lengths or widths, which changes how much runner you need.\n\nNext, decide where each section should begin and end. A runner that stops on the tabletop needs a different cut length from one that extends over the ends. Neither layout is required by this product, so choose according to your table plan and the confirmed material size.\n\nFor a round table, measure the path the runner will follow across the surface. Also check the space needed for place settings. A thin mesh table runner is still a physical part of the layout, even though its open texture looks less solid than fabric.\n\nPlan cutting before reaching for scissors\n\nThe material can be cut to different lengths and shapes. This allows it to be used for table sections and DIY wedding table decorations, but a cutting plan should come first.\n\nWrite down the pieces you need and their intended sizes. Compare the total with the confirmed amount supplied. Allow for the actual layout of the cuts rather than assuming that every offcut will be useful.\n\nLay the mesh out gently and check the intended cut line before starting. Cutting is a change to the item, so inspect it and confirm that it suits your needs first. Change of mind returns require the product to be unused and in its original packaging.\n\nChoose it for the right occasion\n\nFor a wedding reception, the main question is whether gold foil and open mesh fit the rest of the setting. Compare the runner with the actual linen and decorations you intend to use. This is more useful than judging each item on its own.\n\nAs a birthday table runner, it can provide the same gold accent in a different arrangement. Think about where people will sit or gather and leave practical space around the decoration.\n\nFor a holiday table, consider whether you want the gold detail along the table or in shorter sections. The ability to cut the mesh gives you options, but the available quantity still needs to be confirmed before you settle on a design.\n\nKeep the rest of the setting in view\n\nA gold foil table runner is only one part of a table arrangement. The maker's description does not include centrepieces, flowers, candles, table linen, food or drink. Budget and plan for any other items separately.\n\nWhen checking a sample layout, look at the whole table from a seated position as well as from above. Make sure the arrangement leaves room for its intended use. A decoration can look different once plates, glasses or display items are added.\n\nThere is no need to use every possible decorative element. If the mesh provides the texture you wanted, give it enough space to be seen. Choose other items because they serve your plan, not simply because there is room to add them.\n\nCheck venue conditions and safety rules\n\nSuitability for a specific venue is not stated. Ask the venue about its table decoration rules before committing to a setup, especially where heat sources or hanging material may be involved.\n\nNo wind resistance or outdoor stability is specified. If you are considering an outdoor table, do not assume that the runner will stay where it is placed. Review the conditions and discuss the arrangement with the venue.\n\nThe mesh is a decorative material, not a safety barrier or protective covering. Keep it clear of flames, hot items and sharp edges. Candles are not included, and no fire rating is provided for the runner.\n\nHandle and store the mesh gently\n\nThin netting needs careful handling around objects that could catch it. Take your time when unpacking, arranging and removing it from the table. Check the surface before laying it out.\n\nSpecific washing and ironing instructions are not given by the maker by the maker. Read any directions that arrive with the product before attempting either. Do not guess a wash cycle or apply heat based on the polyester description alone, since the foil finish also needs consideration.\n\nAfter use, check the condition before putting the runner away. Store it dry and away from sharp objects. Any future reuse depends on how it has been handled and whether it remains suitable for the next arrangement.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checking\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding or event date.\n\nBuild in time to inspect the runner before decorating day. Check the finish, dimensions and quantity against your plan before cutting it. This is particularly important when the supplied size information needs clarification.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, and no warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this metallic mesh table runner if you want thin polyester netting with a gold foil shimmer and the option to cut it for your arrangement. It is not a sewn sequin runner or a protective table covering.\n\nThe most important step is to confirm the measurements and pack quantity. Once those details match your plan, check the mesh against your table surface, handle it gently and allow plenty of time before the event. That gives you a sound basis for deciding whether this gold accent belongs in your setting.", "llm_summary": "This gold glitter mesh table runner is a decorative polyester netting with a metallic gold foil finish. It is thin mesh, not a runner made from sewn sequins. The material can be cut to different lengths and shapes for wedding, birthday, holiday and DIY decorations. The supplied size entry is 9FTx2, and the unit count entry is 198 sq ft. Clear width, complete dimensions, piece count, weight and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Other table decorations are not included. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by up to 7 working days for tracked courier delivery within Australia only. Change of mind returns require the item to be unused and in its original packaging.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-glitter-mesh-table-runner.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2", "sku": "gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2", "title": "Gold Wire Pillar Candle Holders Set of 2", "slug": "gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2", "price": 77.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.76 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/main-gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "Two glass and iron candle holders offer a paired display for table settings, mantelpieces and wedding decorations.", "description": "A small detail that needs a little planning\n\nA table can feel unfinished even when the linen and place settings are ready. You may want a decorative detail without filling the remaining space with a large arrangement. Candle holders are one option, but their size, candle fit and position matter as much as their colour.\n\nThis Gold Wire Pillar Candle Holders Set of 2 gives you a pair of gold-toned decorations with glass jars and an iron wire design. The set is described as containing a large and a small holder. You can plan them as a pair or place them in separate parts of a display.\n\nBefore ordering, focus on what will fit your table and what your venue allows. The maker gives some useful measurements, but it does not give every detail needed to choose a candle.\n\nWhat the set includes\n\nThe pack contains two candle holders with glass candle jars. The listed materials are glass and iron, and the colour is gold. The outer wire has a spiral design, with a metal bottom cup forming part of the candle-holding structure.\n\nCandles are not included. Neither are flowers, plants or other styling items. That gives you a choice about the finished display, but it also means you should include those separate purchases in your plans.\n\nThe listed item weight is 0.76 kg. Individual holder weights are not given by the maker. If you are packing several sets for an event, remember to allow room for protective wrapping as well as the holders themselves.\n\nUnderstanding the measurements\n\nThe listed product dimensions are 11 cm long, 11 cm wide and 20 cm high. There is an important limit to that information. Although the set is described as large and small, separate dimensions for each holder are not provided.\n\nDo not assume that both pieces measure 20 cm high. If a precise height is needed for your arrangement, ask for confirmation before buying. The same applies if the holders must fit inside a particular shelf space or between other decorations.\n\nYou can mark an 11 × 11 cm area on paper to get a rough sense of the listed footprint. Place it on your table alongside a full place setting. This helps you judge available space, but it does not replace the missing measurements for the pair.\n\nHow the candle display works\n\nThese glass and iron candle holders combine a glass jar with a decorative wire surround. The maker describes them for wax or flameless LED tealights, votives, small pillar candles and taper candles.\n\nThat list is not a guarantee that every candle in those categories will fit. The internal jar diameter, usable depth and maximum candle height are not stated. A candle needs to fit the actual holder, not just match a name such as “small pillar”.\n\nCheck that your chosen candle sits properly and follows its maker's safety instructions. For taper candles in particular, do not assume the set includes a correctly sized taper socket. If secure support cannot be confirmed, choose another candle option.\n\nChoosing wax or flameless candles\n\nStart with the rules for the space. Some venues restrict open flames or require approval for candle arrangements. Ask before buying wax candles for a wedding table, even when you plan to place them inside glass.\n\nFlameless LED tealights are a listed option for this set. They can be worth considering when your display does not need a real flame. Their dimensions still need checking, and the holder listing gives no information about battery type, light output or run time.\n\nFor wax candles, follow the candle maker's instructions on clearances and use. Glass around a flame does not remove the need for supervision. Keep the arrangement away from loose decorations and anything else that could catch fire.\n\nPlanning a wedding table arrangement\n\nWhen choosing wedding table candle holders, begin with the table in use rather than an empty tabletop. Plates, glasses and cutlery take up space. Shared dishes, place cards and table numbers may need room too.\n\nTry a sample layout before deciding how many sets to order. Put the holders where you expect them to sit, then check the view from each seat. Think about whether guests can reach what they need without moving decorations.\n\nThere is no fixed number of holders that suits every table. A long reception table and a small round table need different plans. Use the two-piece pack count to calculate quantities only after you have settled on a layout.\n\nWorking with the gold wire design\n\nThe spiral wire outline gives these gold candle holders an open-sided appearance rather than a solid outer wall. Consider that shape alongside the other items you plan to use. A sample arrangement can help you decide whether the lines work with your tableware.\n\nGold finishes can look different across separate products. If a close colour match matters, compare the actual pieces before committing to a full event setup. Do not assume all items described as gold will have the same tone.\n\nA gold table centrepiece does not need lots of extra decoration. Start with the pair and add only what your table has room for. Leaving some space makes it easier to assess the arrangement and keep practical items accessible.\n\nUsing the holders around the home\n\nThe maker includes mantelpieces, living rooms, bedrooms and bathrooms among the suggested display settings. These are ideas for placement, not confirmation that every surface or room position is suitable.\n\nMeasure the spot first. On a mantelpiece, check depth as well as height. Near a bed or in a bathroom, think about nearby fabrics, towels and items that may be moved during daily use.\n\nPaired candle holders can also be displayed separately. You might use one in a table arrangement and the other elsewhere. Each position still needs its own check for space and safe candle use.\n\nAlternatives to a candle arrangement\n\nAir plants and artificial flowers are listed as alternative uses. They offer a way to use the spiral candle holders without a flame, which may suit a display where candles are not allowed.\n\nThe maker does not confirm that the glass jars are suitable for holding water. Do not plan a fresh flower arrangement that relies on a watertight vessel without checking first. Artificial flowers avoid that particular question, though their fit still matters.\n\nKeep plant material and artificial flowers separate from lit candles. If you change a decorative arrangement into a candle display later, remove the added materials before assessing candle fit and clearances.\n\nOutdoor plans need extra checks\n\nThe maker mentions indoor and outdoor use, but it supplies no weatherproof or wind-resistance rating. The glass jar should not be treated as proof that a flame will remain safe in a breeze.\n\nFor a garden reception or outdoor table, ask the venue what it permits. Check the surface and the expected conditions. If those details are uncertain, rethink the display rather than relying on the holder to solve the problem.\n\nFlameless candles do not make the whole arrangement weatherproof either. Any LED light you choose has its own use instructions, which should be checked separately.\n\nCleaning, packing and storing\n\nAllow candles and holders to cool fully before moving or cleaning them. Wipe gently with a soft cloth, and avoid abrasive pads or cleaners that could mark the glass or finish. Dishwasher suitability is not stated.\n\nThe maker describes an electroplated finish intended to resist rust and fading. That is not a promise of permanent protection. Store the pieces clean and dry, and avoid leaving them exposed to conditions for which no rating is given.\n\nFor transport, protect each glass piece from contact with other decorations. Do not force the holders into an overfilled box. Keep the original packaging if you may need to make a change of mind return.\n\nOrdering ahead and checking the set\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date so you have time to inspect the set and check your chosen candles.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law, and no separate warranty is sold.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis set provides two gold wire candle holders with glass jars for a paired table or home display. Candles are separate, and the individual holder sizes and internal candle measurements are not given by the maker.\n\nCheck those missing details if fit is important. Then plan around your table space, venue rules and delivery timing. A measured choice is more useful than an arrangement that looks right on paper but does not work on the day.", "llm_summary": "This two-piece gold wire candle holder set combines glass and iron in a spiral design. The set is described as containing large and small holders with glass candle jars. Listed product dimensions are 11 × 11 × 20 cm and item weight is 0.76 kg. Separate measurements for each holder and internal candle clearances are not specified by the maker. Candles are not included. The maker describes use with wax or flameless LED tealights, votives, small pillar candles and taper candles, subject to fit. Alternative display uses include air plants and artificial flowers. The holders are listed for table decorations, wedding centrepieces and home displays. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days and tracked courier delivery taking up to seven further working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-wire-pillar-candle-holders-set-of-2.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack", "sku": "place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack", "title": "Place Cards with Sage Green Ribbon, 50 Pack", "slug": "place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack", "price": 30.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack/main-place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack-3.jpg" ], "description_short": "White textured paper cards and pre-cut sage green satin ribbons let you write guest names and coordinate your table settings.", "description": "Give every guest a clear place at the table\n\nA seating plan only helps if guests can tell which place is theirs. Once the tables are set, a small name card gives each person a clear point to look for. It also lets you carry a colour choice through the table without adding a large decoration.\n\nThese sage green ribbon place cards pair white textured paper with a coloured satin ribbon. The cards are blank, so you write the names yourself. Each pack contains 50 cards and 50 pre-cut ribbons.\n\nThe main choice is practical. Do you want to prepare your own names, and does the card size work with your setting? Start there before deciding how to arrange the ribbons or what handwriting style to use.\n\nKnow what is in the pack\n\nThe cards themselves are white. Sage green describes the ribbons, which is worth noting if you are looking for green paper stationery. The white textured surface and sage ribbon are separate parts of the finished look.\n\nEach card measures 1.57 x 3.54 inches. Each ribbon is approximately 11.8 inches long. There are equal quantities of both, so you have one ribbon for each card.\n\nOnly these cards and ribbons are included. You will need your own writing tool, along with any gifts or table items you want to use beside them. Do not plan around decorations shown in a styled setting unless they are listed as part of the pack.\n\nPaper thickness, ribbon width and the satin fibre composition are not specified. If one of those details is essential to your plans, ask before ordering rather than guessing from a photograph.\n\nStart with your guest list\n\nCount the names you need before choosing your pack quantity. One pack provides 50 cards when you use one card for each guest. A guest list above that number will need more than one pack.\n\nThen think about other uses. You might want paper name tags for gifts as well as a card at each seat. Those are separate cards unless the same tagged gift will serve as the place marker.\n\nLeave room in your planning for handwriting tests or a name change. How much extra you need depends on your event, but using every card in your first count leaves no spare space for a mistake.\n\nA final guest list is useful, though you do not need to delay every task until it is ready. You can check your layout and test your writing style while waiting for the last names to be confirmed.\n\nCheck the size in a real table setting\n\nMeasurements are easier to judge when you can see them on the table. Cut a piece of scrap paper to 1.57 x 3.54 inches and set it beside the items you plan to use.\n\nLook at it from a guest's position. Is there a clear place for the name? Will the card sit away from spills? Does a nearby menu or folded napkin hide part of it?\n\nThis check also helps you judge how much text to include. A first name may need less space than a full name with a long surname. If two guests share a first name, decide how you will distinguish them before writing the whole set.\n\nA folded, self-standing format is not specified. Do not assume these wedding table name cards will stand like tent cards. Plan their placement around the actual card rather than an unconfirmed display style.\n\nChoose a clear handwriting style\n\nThe blank cards can be written on with a pen, marker or pencil. The choice comes down to the look you want and how the writing behaves on the textured paper.\n\nTest one card before completing the set. Check whether the letters stay clear and whether the marks dry without smudging when handled. No particular pen brand or ink type is specified for these cards.\n\nWrite a few of your longest guest names first. This gives you a better guide to letter size than starting with the shortest name on the list. Keep the spacing readable rather than trying to fill every part of the card.\n\nHandwritten place cards do not need elaborate lettering to do their job. A steady, simple style can be easier for guests to read. If someone else will help, agree on the name format so the set stays consistent.\n\nUse the ribbon with a plan\n\nThe satin ribbons arrive pre-cut at approximately 11.8 inches each. Before preparing every card, try the tie arrangement you have in mind with one ribbon.\n\nThe amount left after tying depends on what you tie it around and the shape of the knot or bow. Check it with your actual setting or wrapping. Do not assume that a ribbon length will suit every napkin, favour box or gift.\n\nThe maker does not confirm that the ribbons arrive attached to the cards. Allow preparation time rather than expecting the set to be ready to place straight from the pack.\n\nSage green can be part of your table colour plan, but items from different ranges may not match exactly. Compare the ribbons with your other decorations if a close colour match matters to you.\n\nDecide whether the cards mark seats or tables\n\nReception seating cards are most useful when their purpose is clear. A name placed at a seat tells the guest where to sit. A card collected elsewhere may need extra information to tell them where to go.\n\nThink through how guests will use your arrangement. If you want to include both a name and a table number, test that layout within the listed measurements first. There is no stated text capacity.\n\nKeep the wording consistent across the set. Choose whether to use full names, first names or another format, then check the list for duplicates and spelling errors.\n\nA short review before writing can save work later. It is easier to correct the guest list than to replace several finished cards after the seating plan has been passed to someone else.\n\nUse spare cards beyond the seating plan\n\nThese cards can also be used as satin ribbon gift tags or for short greetings. That gives you another use for cards left over after the seating names are finished.\n\nFor wedding favour tags, decide whether you need a guest name, a short thank-you message or both. Try the wording at the actual card size before settling on it.\n\nIf a tagged favour will also mark the guest's seat, check that the name remains easy to see once the ribbon is tied. The decorative part should not cover the information the guest needs.\n\nDinner party place cards offer another use for the same blank format. You can prepare a smaller set for a meal and store unused cards for another occasion. Keep them dry and flat so they are ready when needed.\n\nPrepare and store the finished set carefully\n\nWhite paper can show marks from handling. Work on a clean, dry surface and keep food and drinks away while you write.\n\nAllow ink to dry before stacking cards or adding ribbons. The time needed depends on your writing tool, so use your test card as a guide rather than rushing straight into packing.\n\nOnce the names are ready, sort the cards in a way that suits the setup. Grouping them by table can help the person placing them follow your seating plan.\n\nKeep a copy of the final list with the stationery. If another person is setting up, explain where each card should go. Clear instructions matter more than a complicated ribbon arrangement.\n\nStore unused cards and ribbons in their original packaging. No waterproof rating is stated, so protect the paper from moisture before and during use.\n\nAllow time for delivery and preparation\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. The delivery period is only one part of your schedule. You also need time to check the pack, test your writing and complete the names.\n\nWhen the set arrives, check the contents and measurements before starting. This is the right point to confirm that the ribbon colour and card format suit your plan.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose these blank wedding place cards if you want white textured paper, sage green satin ribbons and space to add names yourself. The pack includes 50 cards and 50 ribbons, with cards measuring 1.57 x 3.54 inches.\n\nCheck your guest count, test a full-size layout and leave time for writing. A clear name, a considered position and a ribbon that fits your arrangement are the details that make the cards useful at the table.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 50 blank white textured paper place cards and 50 pre-cut sage green satin ribbons. Each card measures 1.57 x 3.54 inches, and each ribbon is approximately 11.8 inches long. The cards can be written on with a pen, marker or pencil and used for guest names, gift labels or short greetings. The sage green colour is on the ribbons, while the cards are white. Paper weight, overall product weight and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by delivery of up to 7 working days by tracked courier within Australia only. Change of mind returns have a 14-day window and conditions apply.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/place-cards-with-sage-green-ribbon-50-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft", "sku": "sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft", "title": "Sage Green Cheesecloth Table Runner 10ft", "slug": "sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft", "price": 29.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.12 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/main-sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "Cotton gauze with a wrinkled texture and stitched edges adds a flowing layer to wedding and home table settings.", "description": "A table can have all the right pieces and still feel a little bare. Plates and place settings mark out each seat, but the centre may need a softer line to bring the setting together. A cheesecloth runner offers a simple way to add colour and texture without covering the whole tabletop.\n\nThis sage green cotton runner has a wrinkled finish, stitched edges and a listed length of 10ft. It is supplied as one piece. Before choosing it for a wedding or home setting, the main things to check are your table measurements, the amount of gathering you want and the width. The maker gives two different width figures, so that detail needs confirmation.\n\nWhat cheesecloth adds to a table\n\nA cotton cheesecloth runner creates a different look from a smooth, pressed strip of table linen. The folds are part of the finish, rather than something you need to remove before setting the table. That makes it worth considering when you want a relaxed arrangement.\n\nThe runner can form a soft line through the middle of the table. You might lay it fairly straight or bring sections together into loose folds. Each approach changes how much of the table shows and how much length remains at the ends.\n\nThink of it as a styling layer, not a replacement for every other table covering. It is not listed as waterproof or heat resistant. Use suitable protection where hot dishes or spills could affect the surface beneath it.\n\nCheck the size before planning the look\n\nThe stated size is 10ft x 1pc, with the length also given as 120 inches. That is the useful starting point when deciding whether this long table runner works for your layout.\n\nWidth needs more care. One part of the maker text says 29 inches, while another says 35 inches. Do not build a precise place-setting plan around either figure until the width is confirmed. This matters most on narrow tables, where a wider runner could reach into the space needed for plates and glasses.\n\nMeasure the actual tables you will use, rather than relying on a general description such as banquet table. Ask the venue for tabletop measurements if you cannot visit. Include both length and width, and note any joins between tables placed end to end.\n\nWork out your preferred end drop\n\nFor a straight arrangement, subtract the table length from the runner's 120-inch length. The fabric left over is what you can share between the ends. If you centre the runner, divide that amount equally.\n\nAs a planning example, a 72-inch table would leave 48 inches of fabric, or 24 inches at each end, before any gathering. That example describes the length calculation only. It does not confirm the fit of your table or the width of the supplied runner.\n\nLoose folds use length. If you want a gathered wedding centrepiece runner, allow for that before deciding how far it should hang. A trial arrangement is more useful than a calculation alone because the folds will vary with how you place them.\n\nChoose between straight and gathered styling\n\nA straighter layout makes it easier to see the table's centre line. It can be a useful choice when you have several objects to arrange and want clear gaps between them. You can still leave the natural wrinkles visible.\n\nA gathered layout gives the fabric more variation. Move small sections together, then step back and check the result from a guest's seat. It is easy to focus on the view from above and miss how much space the fabric takes beside a plate.\n\nNeither approach needs to cover the full table. A relaxed table setting often works better when each piece has room around it. Keep serving areas and places for guests' belongings in mind while you arrange the fabric.\n\nSee sage green alongside your other colours\n\nThe listed colour is sage green. Use that as a colour description, not a promise that it will match every other item carrying the same name. Different fabrics and surfaces can look different beside one another.\n\nIf your sage green reception decor depends on a close match, check the runner with your other pieces before committing to the full arrangement. View them together in the room where possible. Lighting can affect how a colour appears.\n\nYou do not need every green item to be identical for a table to feel considered. Still, it helps to decide whether you want a close match or a mix of tones. That choice makes it easier to judge the runner when it arrives.\n\nWho this runner may suit\n\nThis runner is worth considering for someone who likes visible texture and a less formal finish. Listed uses include wedding receptions, bridal showers and home decor, as well as formal and informal settings.\n\nFor rustic wedding table runner styling, the soft folds can sit alongside the other pieces you have chosen without needing a crisp pressed edge. For a boho table runner arrangement, the same fabric can be placed more loosely. The difference comes from your layout, not from needing a different runner.\n\nIt may be less suited to a plan that needs an exact width before ordering or a completely flat, tailored finish. If those details matter most, resolve the measurement question first and consider whether the wrinkled texture fits your brief.\n\nPlan the whole tabletop, not just the fabric\n\nA runner is only one part of the setting. Before ordering, sketch where plates, serving dishes and any centrepieces will sit. This helps you decide how much room you can give to gathered fabric.\n\nKeep objects with bases on a flat, steady surface. Do not rely on loose folds to support them. If you plan to use candles, keep fabric away from flames and follow the candle holder's safety guidance.\n\nOnly the runner is listed as included. Flowers, candles, tableware and other decorations need to be arranged separately. Keeping that distinction clear also helps when you compare the cost of different table styling plans.\n\nCount runners by layout\n\nOne pack contains one runner. Start your quantity plan with the number of separate table arrangements, then check the length needed for each one.\n\nTables placed together may need a different plan from tables standing apart. Do not assume one 10ft runner will dress a whole joined row. Measure the full run and decide whether your design needs gaps, separate sections or a different length.\n\nIt also helps to name each table on your plan. Guest tables, a signing table and a gift table may have different sizes and uses. You may want textured table runner styling on some surfaces while leaving others clear.\n\nUsing it outdoors or away from the table\n\nThe supplied description mentions outdoor events, chairs and wedding arches. These are possible styling uses, but they are not a guarantee of fit or of suitability for a particular venue.\n\nFor outdoor plans, ask the venue how loose fabric will be managed. Wind resistance and weather protection are not specified. A trial indoors will not tell you how an outdoor arrangement will behave.\n\nFor a chair or arch, check the measurements of the structure and discuss the proposed drape with the venue. Fixings are not listed as included, and the runner should not be treated as a structural support.\n\nCare for the intended texture\n\nThe listed care options are hand washing or machine washing in a laundry bag. Check any care label that comes with the item before washing, especially if it gives more detailed instructions.\n\nNo ironing is needed to preserve the wrinkled look. If you are used to pressing all your reception table linen, set this piece aside from that routine. Its texture is part of the intended finish.\n\nDo not assume a guaranteed washing result. Separate testing details for fading and shrinkage are not given by the maker. After cleaning, allow the runner to dry before storing it somewhere clean and dry for another use.\n\nLeave time for delivery and a trial setting\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by up to 7 working days for delivery by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than treating that timing as your last possible ordering window.\n\nWhen the runner arrives, check the colour, measurements and condition before using it. A simple trial with a plate and your planned centrepiece can show whether the layout leaves enough space.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this sage green cheesecloth table runner if soft cotton texture and loose folds suit your setting. You receive one runner with a listed 10ft length and stitched edges.\n\nMeasure first, confirm the conflicting width information and allow for any gathering. Then leave time to check the runner alongside your other table pieces. Those practical steps will help you decide whether it belongs in your final layout.", "llm_summary": "This sage green cheesecloth table runner is listed as cotton, with a 10ft length and one piece in the pack. Its stated weight is 0.12 kg. The fabric has a soft, wrinkled texture and stitched edges intended to help limit fraying. Listed uses include wedding tables, bridal showers, home decor and formal or informal settings. Care guidance allows hand washing or machine washing in a laundry bag, with no ironing needed. Width is inconsistent in the maker text, which states both 29 and 35 inches alongside a 120-inch length. Confirm width before ordering. Brand, country of origin and warranty are not specified by the maker. Only the runner is listed as included.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/sage-green-cheesecloth-table-runner-10ft.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack", "sku": "white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack", "title": "White and Gold Cocktail Napkins, 100 Pack", "slug": "white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack", "price": 45.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack/main-white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack-2.jpg" ], "description_short": "A pack of 100 three-ply paper napkins pairs gold foil dots with a compact size for drinks, appetisers and desserts.", "description": "Small napkins still need a place in the plan\n\nA drinks table can look ready while missing something useful. Guests have glasses in hand, appetisers are being passed around, and there is nowhere nearby to find a napkin. Sorting out that small detail before the event helps make the table easier to use.\n\nThese white and gold cocktail napkins combine a simple paper format with gold foil dots. Each pack contains 100 napkins, with a listed size of 5 x 5 inches. They are intended for drinks, appetisers and desserts.\n\nThe main buying questions are practical. Is that size right for your service? How many will guests use? And does the design fit the rest of your table? Start with those points rather than choosing on colour alone.\n\nWhat the three-ply paper does\n\nThe napkins are made from three-ply paper and are described as soft and absorbent. They offer a place to catch a drink drip or wipe fingers after a small bite. That makes them useful around the moments when guests are eating or drinking without a full place setting.\n\nThey are still paper napkins. No measured absorbency, waterproof rating or spill capacity is provided. Keep separate cleaning supplies available for larger spills, rather than expecting a small beverage napkin to handle them.\n\nDisposable cocktail napkins also avoid the need to collect and launder used fabric. You will still need to clear the tables and arrange waste collection. Think about where used napkins will go, particularly if guests will move between a bar, food station and seating area.\n\nRead the size before choosing\n\nThe listed napkin size is 5 x 5 inches. That is the key measurement to consider when deciding whether these will suit drinks and smaller servings at your event.\n\nThe maker's description also lists product dimensions of 12.7 x 12.7 x 3.81 cm. It does not explain what the height refers to. Do not read that figure as the thickness of an individual napkin, and do not assume it provides an unfolded size.\n\nIf you are choosing a holder or planning a particular fold, check the required measurements first. A small paper square cut to the stated face size can help you picture the space on a table. It will not show the napkin's thickness or feel, but it can help you judge the footprint beside a glass or plate.\n\nWhere cocktail napkins make sense\n\nWedding cocktail napkins are useful during drinks service, when guests may be standing or moving between groups. Put them where people collect their drinks so they do not have to search elsewhere.\n\nThe same size can work beside appetisers or at a dessert station. Small dessert napkins give guests an option for wiping fingers without setting out a full dinner place setting. Match the napkin format to the serving, not just to the name of the event.\n\nFor a seated meal, think separately about dinner napkins. A 5 x 5 inch cocktail napkin may not provide the coverage you want for that part of the day. You can use these at the bar while choosing a different format for dining tables.\n\nWork the gold dots into your table scheme\n\nThe design is white with foil-stamped gold dots. It adds a patterned detail to a table without requiring every item around it to have the same pattern.\n\nOne way to use gold dot cocktail napkins is to keep nearby pieces plain. Another is to repeat the gold colour in an existing table accent. Either approach lets the napkins relate to the wider setting without making every surface busy.\n\nColour names alone do not establish an exact match between different products. If a precise shade of gold matters to you, check the available product images and details before ordering. Do not assume the foil will match cutlery, printed stationery or other gold themed tableware exactly.\n\nPlan quantities around service, not just guests\n\nA pack contains 100 napkins. That is a clear starting point, but it is not a promise that one pack will serve 100 people through an entire event.\n\nA guest might take a napkin with a drink, discard it, then collect another with dessert. Separate service areas can also use supplies at different rates. A busy bar may need replenishing while a quieter table still has most of its stack.\n\nWork through your event in stages and estimate use for each stage. Add those amounts, allow for replacements, then divide by 100 and round up to whole packs. For example, an estimated requirement of 150 napkins means buying two packs. That is a planning example, not a recommended allowance for every gathering.\n\nGive each stack a clear purpose\n\nDrinks table napkins are easiest to find when they sit close to the point of service. Avoid placing the only stack behind a centrepiece or far from where drinks are handed out.\n\nIf you have more than one serving area, divide the supply before guests arrive. Keep a reserve in a clean, dry place and let whoever is managing the table know where it is. This is more useful than setting out every napkin at once and hoping the stacks last evenly.\n\nCheck the available space with your venue or caterer. A small station may need regular refills instead of a large display. Holders, trays and other serving accessories are not included, so arrange those separately if your layout needs them.\n\nDecide whether they suit your gathering\n\nThese napkins are an option for hosts who want white and gold party napkins for drinks and small food servings. The design can fit a wedding reception, an engagement party or a bridal shower if those colours suit the setting.\n\nThey are less suited to plans that depend on washable fabric, a large dinner fold or a confirmed unfolded measurement. Those needs call for different information or a different napkin format.\n\nFor outdoor events, do not assume any wind resistance. Ask the venue how it handles loose paper table supplies and where service stations will be positioned. The maker does not promise suitability for a particular venue, so your layout and conditions need their own check.\n\nCheck the details that are not given by the maker\n\nSome buyers need more than a size and colour description. You might need a particular paper certification, an exact unfolded measurement or information about disposal. Those details are not given by the maker by the maker.\n\nThe napkins are described as paper with gold foil dots, but no compostability or biodegradability certification is provided. Do not choose them on the assumption that they meet a particular environmental standard.\n\nLikewise, there is no personalisation service listed. If your table plan depends on names, initials or a date printed on the napkins, this fixed gold dot design will not meet that requirement. It is better to check a must-have detail before ordering than to try to change the item later.\n\nStore and handle them as paper supplies\n\nKeep unused napkins clean and dry. Leave them in their packaging until you are ready to set up, and avoid storing them where a leaking drink or food container could reach them.\n\nWhen laying out the table, handle the stacks with clean, dry hands. Keep paper away from flames and other heat sources. If the table includes candles, plan the arrangement so napkins cannot come into contact with them.\n\nThese napkins are disposable and should not be washed. After use, follow local waste guidance for paper napkins with foil decoration. Keep any unused reserve separate from used table supplies so it stays clean.\n\nLeave time for delivery and a final check\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding or event rather than leaving table supplies until the final week.\n\nWhen the order arrives, check that it meets your needs before opening packaging unnecessarily. Confirm the pack quantity and compare the listed size with your planned use. This gives you time to address a problem before the table needs to be set.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery if the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose these napkins if you want a pack of 100 three-ply paper cocktail napkins with a white and gold dot design. Their 5 x 5 inch size is intended for drinks, appetisers and desserts.\n\nCheck the size against your serving plan, allow for guests taking fresh napkins, and arrange any holders or other tableware separately. With those decisions made, you can choose your pack quantity and give this small table detail a clear place in the event.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 100 white paper cocktail napkins decorated with foil-stamped gold dots. The napkins are three-ply, soft and absorbent, and are described for use with drinks, appetisers and desserts. The listed napkin size is 5 x 5 inches. The maker's description also gives product dimensions of 12.7 x 12.7 x 3.81 cm, without identifying the height as an individual napkin measurement. These are disposable paper napkins, not reusable linen. A brand, country of origin and populated product weight field are not specified by the maker. Glasses, food and other decorations are not included. Delivery is Australia only. Change of mind returns require unused goods in their original packaging within 14 days of delivery.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-and-gold-cocktail-napkins-100-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand", "sku": "white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand", "title": "White Porcelain Three-Tier Cake Stand", "slug": "white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand", "price": 53.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "1.25 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand/main-white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand.jpg" ], "description_short": "Three display levels and a subtle diamond texture give cakes and small treats a dedicated place on your table.", "description": "Give small treats a place on the table\n\nA table can fill up quickly once you add cups, side plates and food. Cakes placed among everything else can be hard to see, while separate serving plates may leave little room for guests. A tiered display offers a different way to arrange the food, using height as part of the layout.\n\nThis white porcelain 3 tier cake stand gives cakes, desserts and small treats three display levels. It has a round shape and a subtle diamond texture, with a gift box included. The white colour keeps the serving piece simple enough to consider alongside the tableware you already own.\n\nBefore choosing it, think about what you want to serve and where it will sit. The overall measurements are useful, but they do not tell you the size of each tier or how much food it can safely hold.\n\nWhat the three-level format changes\n\nA three tier cake stand separates a display into different levels. That can help you give each type of treat its own place, rather than mixing everything on one large plate. It also gives guests a clear view of the choices when the stand is placed where they can reach it.\n\nYou do not need to fill every part of each tier. Leaving space around food makes it easier to pick up and helps you see when something needs replacing. Start with a modest arrangement, then add more only where there is room.\n\nThink about access as well as appearance. A tall dessert may fit on a plate but still be awkward to lift out beneath another tier. The tier spacing is not stated by the maker, so confirm that detail if your menu depends on taller portions.\n\nRead the measurements before planning the menu\n\nThe listed overall dimensions are 27 cm long, 27 cm wide and 32.5 cm high. The item weight is 1.25 kg. Those are the measurements to use when checking the space on your table or in a cupboard.\n\nMark out a 27 cm by 27 cm area on your table with paper. Then allow space around it for hands, cups and plates. This simple check is more useful than judging the size from a product photograph alone.\n\nThe overall width is not a confirmed diameter for every serving tier. Individual tier diameters, usable serving areas and load limits are not given by the maker. If you need to display a particular cake, check both its size and weight against confirmed product guidance before ordering.\n\nChoose food with serving access in mind\n\nFor an afternoon tea stand, the easiest menu to plan is one that accounts for how guests will take each portion. Consider the width and height of the food, not just how many pieces you hope to serve.\n\nSmall cakes and treats are the intended display items, but there is no stated cupcake count or serving capacity. Portions vary too much to give a reliable number from the overall dimensions alone. Paper cases and decorations can also take up more space than expected.\n\nAvoid building your event menu around an assumed capacity. Keep a separate serving plan for extra food and refill the display as needed. That lets you offer a smaller selection on the stand without trying to fit the whole menu onto it at once.\n\nDecide whether the white porcelain look suits you\n\nWhite porcelain gives this stand a simple base colour, while the geometric diamond pattern adds surface detail. It is worth considering if you want a serving piece with texture rather than a coloured design.\n\nLook at the plates, cups and linen you plan to use beside it. You do not need every item to match, but it helps to decide which pieces will carry colour and which will stay quiet in the background. This white porcelain cake stand can be part of that choice.\n\nThe texture is a design feature, not a reason to assume any special performance. The maker does not state scratch resistance, stain resistance or other surface treatments. Treat it as porcelain and follow the supplied care directions.\n\nPlan a high tea table around people\n\nA high tea table display should work for the people sitting around it. Before setting out food, place the empty stand where you intend to use it. Add your cups and side plates so you can judge the remaining room.\n\nCheck whether guests can reach the lower levels without stretching across a hot drink. If the table is long, one central display may not be convenient for everyone. You may prefer to keep some food on separate plates within easier reach.\n\nAt 32.5 cm high, the stand also adds height to the setting. Consider how that fits with conversation and other table decorations. Avoid crowding the space around it just to create a fuller-looking centrepiece.\n\nThink through a wedding dessert table\n\nFor a wedding dessert table, start with the venue layout and menu rather than the decoration alone. Check the stand's overall size against the serving area, including any other platters and the space guests will need to queue or pass.\n\nA wedding dessert table stand should be chosen for a clear serving role. You might want a small display of selected treats rather than one piece expected to hold the full dessert course. There is no stated capacity here, so do not plan guest numbers around an assumed quantity.\n\nAsk the venue about placement and service arrangements before ordering. Outdoor suitability and wind resistance are not specified, and the maker's description does not confirm suitability for a particular venue. An exposed setting needs its own assessment rather than a guess based on appearance.\n\nConsider everyday use and gifting\n\nThis stand is described for everyday use as well as special occasions. That makes it worth considering if you enjoy setting out cakes for visitors and want a dedicated serving piece beyond a standard plate.\n\nIt is supplied gift boxed, so it is also an option for a wedding, housewarming or another celebration. A gift boxed cake stand is most useful when it fits the recipient's habits and storage space. Think about whether they enjoy entertaining and have room for a piece of this size.\n\nThe pack contains one stand. Food, drinks and decorative accessories are not included. If you are giving it as a gift, keep the order information and avoid using the stand beforehand in case a change of mind return is needed.\n\nCheck instructions before the first use\n\nThe maker does not explain the assembly method or identify the material of joining parts. When the stand arrives, read any supplied instructions before putting it together. Do not assume fittings work in the same way as another stand you have owned.\n\nCheck the porcelain and any supplied parts before use. If something is damaged or unclear, contact us rather than forcing a connection or trying to repair it yourself. A serving piece should be checked before food is arranged on it.\n\nMaximum load is not stated. That is especially important if you are considering a whole cake or another heavy item. Get the missing information before making it part of a fixed event plan.\n\nClean and store with care\n\nHandle the porcelain carefully around taps, sinks and other crockery. Follow the product's supplied care directions first. Until cleaning compatibility is confirmed, gentle hand washing with mild detergent is a sensible approach.\n\nDishwasher, microwave and oven suitability are not specified. Do not assume that permission to use one porcelain item in an appliance applies to this stand, particularly when joining components may also be involved.\n\nDry the pieces thoroughly before storage and keep them where they cannot knock against other hard objects. Retain the instructions and packaging. If you plan to store the stand between celebrations, check how it should be packed away rather than assuming it can be taken apart in a particular way.\n\nLeave time for delivery and checks\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within two working days, and delivery then takes up to seven working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of a wedding or other event so you have time to receive and inspect the stand.\n\nOnce it arrives, check the size, condition and instructions before using it. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage for a change of mind return.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. No warranty is sold. Keep your order details handy if you need help.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this porcelain serving stand if you want three display levels, a white finish and a subtle diamond pattern. It measures 27 × 27 × 32.5 cm overall, weighs 1.25 kg and comes gift boxed.\n\nCheck your table space and serving needs before ordering. Confirm any missing tier measurements or load information that your menu depends on, and leave time to inspect it before the occasion.", "llm_summary": "This white porcelain three-tier cake stand is a round serving piece for cakes, desserts and small treats. It has a subtle geometric diamond pattern and is supplied gift boxed. The listed overall dimensions are 27 cm long, 27 cm wide and 32.5 cm high. Its listed weight is 1.25 kg, and the pack contains one stand. It is described for everyday use and special occasions. Individual tier diameters, tier spacing, maximum load, assembly method and hardware materials are not specified by the maker. Dishwasher, microwave and oven suitability are also not specified. Food and decorative accessories are not included. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days and tracked courier delivery then taking up to seven working days.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-porcelain-3-tier-cake-stand.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-tent-place-cards-160-pack", "sku": "white-tent-place-cards-160-pack", "title": "White Tent Place Cards, 160 Pack", "slug": "white-tent-place-cards-160-pack", "price": 31.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "reception-and-tables", "category_label": "Reception And Tables", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/main-white-tent-place-cards-160-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/reception-and-tables/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "This pack of 160 blank paper cards folds into freestanding name displays for wedding tables, dinners and parties.", "description": "A small card that answers a useful question\n\nGuests arriving at a reception often have one simple question. Where should I sit? A table plan can point them towards the right table, while a place card shows the seat you have chosen for them.\n\nThese white tent place cards give you a blank surface for each guest's name. There are 160 paper cards in the pack, each measuring 2 by 3.5 inches when folded. You add the writing, fold the card and set it in position.\n\nThe format is simple, but it still pays to plan before buying. Guest numbers, handwriting size and the space around each plate all affect whether a card suits your setup. Start with those practical details rather than choosing stationery on appearance alone.\n\nHow the tent format works\n\nA tent card folds across a scored line to make two panels. The folded shape stands without a separate holder, so you do not need to add a stand to each place setting.\n\nEach card in this pack measures 4 by 3.5 inches unfolded. Once folded, the visible face measures 2 by 3.5 inches. That is the area to use when planning the main guest name or short label.\n\nBefore writing the full set, fold one sample and look at it from the guest's side of the table. It is easy to write on the wrong panel when working with flat cards. A sample gives you a reference for the writing direction and the position of the fold.\n\nFreestanding does not mean suitable for every condition. Wind resistance is not stated, so do not assume the cards will stay in place at an outdoor venue.\n\nWho these cards suit\n\nWedding receptions are one use for these blank seating cards. They let you assign individual seats rather than leaving guests to choose a place once they reach their table. This can help when you have made a detailed seating plan.\n\nThey can also be used as dinner party place cards or for names at corporate gatherings. The same blank format lets you change the wording to suit the occasion. There is no preprinted event message to work around.\n\nFor a smaller gathering, you may have cards left after writing the guest names. Store those flat for another event rather than preparing more than you need.\n\nThese are cards to write yourself. If you need supplied printed names, a particular typeface or a finished stationery service, those are not included in this pack.\n\nWork out how many cards you need\n\nCount one card for every guest who needs an assigned seat. Then allow for cards used during testing and any names that may need to be rewritten.\n\nA pack of 160 covers 160 seats only if every card becomes a finished guest card. If your guest count is close to that number, think about how you will handle mistakes or late changes. Spare cards are useful when a name spelling changes after the main set has been written.\n\nCount other uses separately. A few short table labels may seem like a small addition, but they still come out of the same pack.\n\nKeep your count tied to the latest seating list. Writing from an older version can leave you with duplicate names and missing cards, even when you ordered enough to begin with.\n\nCheck the size against your table layout\n\nThe folded size is 2 by 3.5 inches. Before ordering, mark out a paper sample of that size and place it beside the items you plan to use on the table.\n\nConsider where the name will be easiest to see. A menu, folded napkin or favour could cover part of the card if everything is placed close together. Moving the card slightly may solve the problem without changing the rest of the setting.\n\nCheck the view from a seated position as well as from above. Table layouts are often planned while standing, but guests will read much of the stationery while sitting down.\n\nIf you intend to use these as table-number cards, think about viewing distance. A small card beside a plate serves a different purpose from a number that guests need to spot across a room.\n\nChoose writing that guests can read\n\nThe uncoated paper surface can be used with pens, markers and calligraphy tools. The choice of tool affects how much space each name takes and how long the ink needs to dry.\n\nStart with one spare card. Write a short name and your longest guest name in the style you plan to use. Check whether both are easy to read without squeezing the letters together.\n\nFor handwritten place cards, clear lettering is more useful than a complicated style that leaves guests guessing. You can still use decorative lettering, but give the actual name enough space.\n\nTest the pen you will use, not just a similar one. Ink behaviour can vary. The maker does not specify printer compatibility, so do not assume these cards can be fed through your printer.\n\nKeep decoration clear of the name\n\nWhite wedding stationery gives you a blank starting point, but it does not need a lot of added detail. A guest name on its own may be enough for the place setting.\n\nIf you want to add artwork or a small motif, sketch the layout on a sample first. Leave the main name area clear and keep important writing away from the fold.\n\nThe unfolded size can be useful while planning, but remember that the whole surface will not face the guest once folded. Design for the finished tent shape rather than treating the card as one flat sign.\n\nFor bilingual wording or longer labels, test the full text before preparing the set. The available space stays the same, even when the message grows. Shortening a label may be more readable than making every letter smaller.\n\nPrepare the cards in a manageable order\n\nWait until the guest list is reasonably settled before writing the final cards. You can test pens and practise lettering earlier without committing the whole pack to a draft seating plan.\n\nWork from one checked list. Confirm spellings, including accents and preferred names, before you begin. If two guests share a first name, decide how you will distinguish their cards.\n\nPrepare the cards in small batches so that written surfaces have room to dry. Avoid stacking them straight after writing, even if the ink appears dry at a glance.\n\nOnce finished, sort your reception place cards by table or another order that makes sense for setup. Keep a current seating list with them. This helps the person placing the cards match each name to the right seat.\n\nStore and transport them with care\n\nPaper cards should be kept dry and protected from spills. Store unused cards flat, away from anything that might bend or mark them.\n\nLet all writing dry before packing completed cards. If you plan to transport them flat, keep your folded sample as a reminder of the intended orientation. Fold and check each finished card before placing it at the venue.\n\nAvoid leaving the cards on a damp preparation surface. A clean, dry area gives you room to sort names without exposing the paper to moisture.\n\nThere is no waterproof rating in the maker's description. For a venue where damp tables or weather could be a concern, discuss the setup conditions before relying on paper table cards.\n\nAllow time for delivery and preparation\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than treating delivery day as your writing day.\n\nLeave room in your schedule to inspect the pack, test your chosen pen and complete the names. A large guest list can take several writing sessions, especially if you are using detailed lettering.\n\nCheck the size and quantity before starting work. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. If something arrives wrong, contact us with the order details so the issue can be addressed.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis pack provides 160 blank white paper tent cards. They measure 2 by 3.5 inches folded, have an uncoated writing surface and stand without separate holders when folded along the scored line.\n\nChoose them if you want to write your own guest names or short table labels. Check the size against your setting, allow spare cards for corrections and test your pen before completing the pack. A little planning makes the writing and table setup easier to manage.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 160 blank white paper tent place cards for guest names and table labels. Each card measures 2 by 3.5 inches folded and 4 by 3.5 inches unfolded. The cards have an uncoated surface and a pre-scored fold. Folded cards stand without separate holders. Pens, markers and calligraphy tools can be used to add text, with a test on a spare card recommended before completing the set. The cards can be stored flat. They may be used for weddings, dinners, parties and corporate gatherings. Only the paper cards are included. Paper weight, product weight, country of origin and printer compatibility are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-tent-place-cards-160-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs", "sku": "black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs", "title": "Black Metal Wedding Sign Easel", "slug": "black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs", "price": 83.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "signs-and-guest-books", "category_label": "Signs And Guest Books", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/main-black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "A folding frame and adjustable support clips help you position a lightweight sign without taking up table space.", "description": "Give your sign a clear place to stand\n\nA welcome sign needs somewhere to go. Leaning it against a wall may put it below guests' eye level, while placing it on a table can take space needed for a guest book or other items. A floor stand gives the sign a separate place in your layout.\n\nThis black metal easel stand for wedding signs is intended for lightweight boards and posters. It has adjustable plastic support clips, a folding frame and a stated display height of 63 inches. The maximum display load is 5 pounds.\n\nThose details are a useful starting point, but choosing a stand also means checking the sign itself. Board size, weight and the available floor space all matter. Start with those practical checks before deciding where the display will sit.\n\nHow the folding frame works\n\nThe frame uses spring-loaded joints and an internal elastic rope to help the sections come together. Once set up, the stand supports the sign on plastic clips that can slide up and down. This changes the support position without needing to change the sign.\n\nBefore adding a board, check that the frame sections are seated correctly and the clips are in place. Position the stand on a suitable surface, then check how the board rests on its supports. Do not leave a display in place if it rocks, slips or seems poorly supported.\n\nThe adjustable sign easel does not have a stated clip adjustment range. That means you should not assume it will suit every display height. If a precise reading height matters, confirm the available adjustment before ordering.\n\nCheck the full weight of your sign\n\nThe stated maximum load is 5 pounds. Use the weight of the finished display, not just the bare board, when checking this limit. A frame, attached lettering or decorations can add weight that is easy to overlook.\n\nA lightweight printed board and a framed sign can have very different weights even when they look similar in size. Weigh your actual display rather than judging it by appearance. If someone else is making the sign, ask them for the finished weight.\n\nWeight is only one part of fit. A board below the limit can still be too awkward for its supports. The maker does not state the maximum supported width, height or thickness, so check those points before buying a sign specifically for this stand.\n\nRead the measurements with care\n\nThe stated display height is 63 inches. The folding description gives a folded length of 15 inches, while a separate size entry lists 15.5 × 2.75 × 2.75 inches. These figures should be checked against your storage or transport space rather than treated as identical.\n\nThere is also a listed product dimension of 6.9 D × 40.6 W × 5.8 H centimetres. It is not identified as the assembled floor footprint. Do not use this small set of dimensions to decide how much space the open stand needs at your venue.\n\nIf you are planning a narrow entrance or a small reception corner, ask about the full open measurements before ordering. A floor poster easel needs space for its legs as well as the board above them. Guests should be able to pass without stepping around either part.\n\nChoose the board before finalising the layout\n\nA wedding welcome sign stand should work with the board you plan to display. Start by noting the board's finished dimensions, material and weight. Then check whether its lower edge can rest securely on the support clips.\n\nPaper alone may need a separate backing, but backing is not listed as included with this stand. Nor is a sign, frame or printed design. Allow for those parts separately when planning your display and budget.\n\nDo not assume that a familiar print size guarantees a fit. A1 and A2 compatibility is not stated by the maker. The same caution applies to thick frames, mirrors and unusually shaped signs, even when their weight appears to be within the limit.\n\nDecide where guests will read it\n\nThink about the moment when someone needs the information. A welcome board belongs where arriving guests can see it without stopping in a doorway. A seating chart needs enough space for people to pause and read without blocking everyone behind them.\n\nThis reception sign easel is a floor display, so it can keep a table free. Even so, the floor area it uses needs to be part of your plan. Avoid placing the legs where a queue is likely to form or where staff need to carry items past.\n\nTry viewing your planned sign from the direction guests will approach. Small text may require people to move closer. A useful position gives them room to do that without stepping into a busy route.\n\nUse indoors, or outdoors only without wind\n\nThe use guidance recommends indoor placement or outdoor placement only when there is no wind. This is an important limit for a lightweight display stand. A large sign can catch moving air, even if the stand itself seems easy to position.\n\nAnti-skid rubber bottoms help reduce slipping at the feet. They do not make the frame wind-resistant, and they do not guarantee stability on every surface. Check the floor and the complete display before leaving it in position.\n\nFor an outdoor ceremony, discuss an indoor alternative with your venue in advance. If wind develops, move the display out of use rather than assuming it will remain secure. The maker gives no waterproof rating, so rain exposure should not be treated as suitable either.\n\nConsider the look without forgetting the practical checks\n\nThe listed colour is black. That can be useful when you want the sign to remain the main focus, but the maker does not specify whether the surface finish is matt or gloss. Avoid planning around a particular sheen without checking it first.\n\nThe listed materials are plastic, metal art, rubber and metal. The product description identifies metal frame sections, plastic clips and rubber bottoms. No material grade or coating specification is supplied.\n\nWhen comparing a black metal easel stand with another display option, start with fit and placement. Colour matters to the overall setting, but it cannot make an unsuitable board safe to display. Settle the load, support and floor-space questions before making the final styling choice.\n\nPlan transport and setup together\n\nA folding display easel can be easier to put away than a frame that stays fully open. This stand has a stated folded length of 15 inches, with the separate size listing noted above. Check the space available in your vehicle or storage box before packing it.\n\nProtect the plastic clips from pressure during transport. Avoid placing heavy event supplies on top of the folded frame, and keep small parts of the display together so they can be checked on arrival.\n\nGive whoever is setting up a clear plan for the sign location. Include a reminder about the 5-pound load limit and outdoor wind restriction. A short rehearsal before the event helps you spot fit problems while there is still time to make another arrangement.\n\nAllow time for delivery and checking\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than leaving the purchase until the final week.\n\nAllow time to inspect the stand and compare it with your planned board. Check the return conditions before using it if you are still deciding whether to keep it. Change of mind returns require the item to be unused and in its original packaging.\n\nThose returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery, with return postage paid by the customer. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Keep the packaging while you make your initial checks.\n\nCare for it between events\n\nWipe the frame with a soft cloth and dry it before storage. Look over the joints, support clips and rubber feet before each use. If a part appears damaged or no longer holds as expected, do not rely on the stand for a display.\n\nFold the frame without forcing the joints. Store it somewhere dry, with the clips protected from crushing. Keeping it separate from loose decorations can also make the next setup easier.\n\nIf you plan to use it later as an event sign holder or trade show easel, check each new sign on its own merits. A board that worked at one event does not confirm the fit of a larger or heavier replacement.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis stand offers a folding frame, adjustable sign supports and a black finish for a lightweight floor display. It holds up to 5 pounds and is intended for indoor use or outdoor use without wind.\n\nChoose it only after checking your finished board and the space around it. Confirm any missing fit measurements, allow time for delivery and keep the display away from busy walkways. The right match is a sign that rests properly on the supports in a location guests can approach safely.", "llm_summary": "This black metal easel stand is intended for wedding signs, posters, shop signs and trade show displays. The pack contains one stand. It has spring-loaded joints, an internal elastic rope, adjustable plastic support clips and anti-skid rubber bottoms. The stated display height is 63 inches, folded length is 15 inches and maximum sign load is 5 pounds. Listed materials are plastic, metal art, rubber and metal. A separate size is given as 15.5 × 2.75 × 2.75 inches, with product dimensions of 6.9 D × 40.6 W × 5.8 H cm. Full assembled footprint and supported sign sizes are not specified. Use is recommended indoors or outdoors without wind.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/black-metal-easel-stand-for-wedding-signs.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder", "sku": "gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder", "title": "Gold Wedding Signing Pen with Holder", "slug": "gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder", "price": 31.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "signs-and-guest-books", "category_label": "Signs And Guest Books", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": "0.07 kg", "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/main-gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder-5.jpg" ], "description_short": "A gold-coloured alloy pen with a hollow round holder brings a coordinated detail to your guest book setup.", "description": "A guest book can be ready to go, yet guests still need to find something to write with. A loose pen may be hard to spot among cards, flowers and other table items. Giving it a clear place helps make the signing area easier to understand.\n\nThis gold wedding signing pen comes with a hollow round holder. It has a twist action for opening and closing the writing tip, and the pen rotates through 360 degrees on its base. It is a small part of the table setup, but one worth checking before the day.\n\nThe right choice depends on more than colour. Your book's paper, the space on the table and the time available before the event all matter. Here is how to work through those details.\n\nStart with the guest book, not the decorations\n\nIt is tempting to choose every table accessory by appearance first. For a signing pen, begin with the surface your guests will write on.\n\nThis set is listed for wedding, bridal and engagement guest book signing. That does not confirm compatibility with every kind of page. Ink colour, ink type and drying time are not specified. Neither is performance on coated or glossy paper.\n\nCheck what your guest book maker recommends. If you have spare matching paper, use that for a writing test once you have decided to keep the pen. Look at the result before using it on a page you want to preserve.\n\nA guest book is not included with this set. Choosing the book separately gives you time to check the page format and whether guests will have enough space for their messages.\n\nUnderstand how the pen and holder work\n\nThe pen opens with a twist and closes the same way. Before setting it out, become familiar with that movement so you can show anyone helping with the table.\n\nThe pen can rotate through 360 degrees on the base. This is a stated feature, but it does not tell you the holder's dimensions or how it will behave on every surface. Try the arrangement on your actual table rather than assuming the base will suit a narrow ledge or crowded display.\n\nThe hollow round holder gives the wedding guest book pen a designated position. Think of that position as part of the table layout. Guests should be able to spot the pen, pick it up and write without moving nearby decorations.\n\nAvoid forcing the moving parts. If anything seems wrong when the item arrives, contact us before trying to alter it.\n\nCheck the known measurements\n\nThe pen is approximately 16 cm long. The listed item weight is 0.07 kg, and the unit count is 1 count. The set consists of the signing pen and holder.\n\nThose details are useful, but they do not describe the whole footprint. The holder's diameter, its height and the overall assembled dimensions are not stated. If you are fitting the set into a small tray or a fixed table display, ask for those measurements before ordering.\n\nMeasure the usable area beside your open book. A closed guest book takes up less space than one spread out for writing, so plan with the pages open.\n\nLeave room for a guest's forearm as well. A wedding pen with base should sit within reach without taking over the area needed to write a message.\n\nDecide whether the gold colour suits your table\n\nThe listed colour is gold and the material is alloy. The exact alloy and surface coating are not specified.\n\nA gold pen and holder can repeat a colour already used elsewhere in your setup. You might place it near gold-coloured signage or other reception guest book accessories that you already own. Those other items are separate purchases and are not included here.\n\nDo not expect an exact match between unrelated gold finishes. Colour names alone do not confirm that two items will look the same beside each other.\n\nIf matching is important, compare the pieces together before the event. Look at them under lighting similar to the venue's lighting if possible. This is more useful than judging each item separately on a screen.\n\nGive guests room to write\n\nA good guest book table setup should make the next step clear. Keep the open book visible and put the pen close enough that guests do not have to search for it.\n\nTry the arrangement from the guest's side of the table. Sit or stand as they will, then check whether you can reach the page without brushing against other items.\n\nIf decorations fill the writing area, move some back. A smaller display with usable writing space is often more practical than a full table that leaves nowhere to rest a hand.\n\nThe holder can provide a clear place to return the pen. Let anyone looking after the guest book area know where it belongs so they can check the setup during the event.\n\nThink about the event and venue\n\nThis set is intended for wedding, bridal and engagement signing. It may suit a dedicated guest book area where you want a gold-coloured detail rather than a loose everyday pen.\n\nVenue suitability still needs checking. The maker does not confirm wind resistance or performance outdoors. It also does not promise stability on every table surface.\n\nFor an outdoor event, discuss the signing area with the venue. Do not assume the holder will stay in place in wind simply because it has a base.\n\nFor an indoor table, check the usable space and the surface on which it will sit. If a cloth, runner or display tray changes the arrangement, include that in your setup trial. Testing the full layout is more helpful than checking the pen alone.\n\nConfirm the details that are not listed\n\nSome small pen details can make a big difference to your plans. Ink colour is one. Refill compatibility is another.\n\nIf you need black or blue ink for a particular book, confirm that before ordering. The gold exterior does not tell you what colour the pen writes.\n\nDo not buy replacement refills on the assumption that a common size will fit. No refill type or size is given in the maker's description.\n\nThe same caution applies to unusual signing surfaces. Wood, acrylic and coated keepsakes may need a different writing tool. This twist action signing pen should not be treated as a confirmed option for those materials without further information.\n\nPrepare without overlooking the returns terms\n\nWhen the set arrives, check the contents and visible condition. Keep the original packaging while deciding whether the size and colour suit your plans.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Writing tests count as use, so decide whether you are keeping the set before testing the ink.\n\nOnce that decision is made, try it on spare paper rather than the first page of your guest book. Practise the twist action and check how the pen sits with its round pen holder.\n\nYou may also want to arrange a separate backup writing tool for the event. A backup is not included in this set, so account for it in your planning if you choose to have one.\n\nKeep care simple\n\nUse a soft, dry cloth to wipe the pen and holder gently. Avoid abrasive cleaners and soaking, since the exact coating is not specified.\n\nClose the writing tip before putting the pen away. Protect both pieces from knocks during storage and transport, especially if you are packing them with other table accessories.\n\nKeep the parts together so whoever sets up the venue can find them easily. A short note with your table plan can help explain where the pen should go.\n\nAfter the event, the same gentle approach applies. Refill availability is unknown, so do not base your decision on an assumed long-term refill option.\n\nAllow time for delivery\n\nDelivery is within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, then delivery takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier.\n\nOrder well ahead of the wedding date. Allow time to receive the parcel, inspect it and make any needed changes to your table plan.\n\nIf the item arrives faulty or damaged, contact us. These issues are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nFor a gift, check the recipient's event date as well as their colour scheme. Gift packaging is not specified, so plan any wrapping separately.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this gold wedding signing pen with holder if you want a gold-coloured alloy set for a wedding, bridal or engagement guest book. It offers a hollow round holder, twist operation and 360-degree rotation on the base.\n\nCheck paper compatibility and ink colour before relying on it for your book. Confirm holder measurements if space is tight, and leave enough room for guests to write. With those details settled and delivery time allowed, you can give this small part of the signing table the attention it needs.", "llm_summary": "This gold wedding signing pen comes with a hollow round holder for wedding, bridal and engagement guest book signing. The listed material is alloy. The pen is approximately 16 cm long, the listed item weight is 0.07 kg, and the unit count is 1 count. The pen rotates 360 degrees on its base and twists to write or close. Ink colour, refill compatibility, holder dimensions and country of origin are not specified by the maker. A guest book is not included. Dispatch is within 2 working days, with delivery then taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier in Australia only. Unused change of mind returns in original packaging are accepted within 14 days of delivery; customers pay return postage.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-wedding-signing-pen-with-holder.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos", "sku": "wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos", "title": "Pink Linen Wedding Photo Guest Book", "slug": "wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos", "price": 68.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "signs-and-guest-books", "category_label": "Signs And Guest Books", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/main-wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-6.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/signs-and-guest-books/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos-7.jpg" ], "description_short": "A pink linen cover, gold foil lettering and 50 blank sheets give guests room for photos, memories and handwritten wishes.", "description": "A wedding can pass quickly, and there is rarely time for a long conversation with every guest. A photo guest book gives people another way to leave something personal. A picture records who was there, while a handwritten note adds the memory, joke or wish that a photograph cannot capture on its own.\n\nThe useful part is making it easy for guests to contribute. Choose a book that suits your plans, work out how the photos will be added and give people a clear place to write. This pink linen book offers 50 blank sheets, a 9 x 7 inch format and a bookmark ribbon. Here is how to decide whether it fits your day.\n\nStart with the kind of memories you want\n\nBefore thinking about the table decorations, decide what you want to read after the celebration. A simple name and date take little space. A shared memory or a photo with a message needs more room.\n\nA wedding message book can hold a mix of contributions. Some guests will write a few words, while others may tell a story. Blank sheets leave that choice open, rather than asking everyone to fill in the same boxes.\n\nYou can still offer a gentle prompt. Ask guests for a favourite memory of you as a couple, or something they hope you will enjoy together. Keep the request short enough to understand at a glance. People should spend their time writing, not working out the instructions.\n\nWhat this book offers\n\nThis book has a pink linen cover with gold foil lettering. Inside are 50 blank sheets, and a ribbon lets you mark a page. The listed book size is 9 x 7 inches.\n\nThose are the details to use when planning your setup. The maker does not specify paper weight, exact cover wording or a fixed photo capacity. It also does not give the usable writing area of each sheet. Avoid assuming that the outer measurements tell you exactly how much room is available inside.\n\nThe plain interior is useful if you want guests to choose their own arrangement. It also means that you will need to think through spacing yourself. A little planning before the event can make that freedom easier for everyone to use.\n\nPlan photos and messages together\n\nAn instant photo guest book works best when the picture and note feel like one entry. Start by measuring the photos you plan to use. Then think about where a guest could write without crowding the image.\n\nMake a paper template before the day. Mark out a possible photo position and a writing area, using the listed book dimensions as an initial guide. Once the book arrives, check the idea against the actual sheets.\n\nDo not treat 50 sheets as a promise of 50 guests or a set number of photos. Couples and families might share an entry, and some people may need more room. Your layout matters more than a simple headcount. If every guest will contribute separately, allow for that when deciding whether one book meets your plans.\n\nArrange the separate supplies\n\nThe book is the place to collect contributions, not a complete photo station. Cameras, film, photos, pens and photo attachments are not listed as included. Work out what you need separately before the event.\n\nThink through the process from a guest's point of view. Where will they take a photo? Where will they wait for it to be ready? How will they attach it, and which pen should they use?\n\nChoose an attachment method according to its own instructions, then test it with the book. Paper and adhesive compatibility are not specified by the maker. Avoid making the wedding reception the first time you try a new pen or photo attachment. A small test gives you time to change your supplies if needed.\n\nMake the signing table easy to use\n\nA guest book table needs room for someone to pause and write. Check the 9 x 7 inch measurements against your available surface, then allow extra space for the open book and separate supplies. The listed size alone is not enough to plan the whole station.\n\nKeep drinks away from the writing area. Put pens where guests can find them, and place any photo instructions beside the book rather than beneath other decorations.\n\nConsider asking a trusted friend to point guests towards the station during a quieter part of the reception. That person can explain the idea without making it feel like a task. The bookmark ribbon can mark the next page so guests do not have to search through earlier entries.\n\nChoose a look that fits your celebration\n\nThe pink cover and gold foil lettering give this linen cover guest book a clear colour direction. If your decorations already include pink or gold, compare those details with the book before deciding how to style the table.\n\nAn exact shade of pink is not specified. If a close colour match matters to you, confirm what you can before ordering rather than relying on a colour name alone.\n\nKeep surrounding items practical. The book should be easy to see and reach, with enough open space to use it. A wedding photo keepsake does not need a large display to be meaningful. The contributions inside will matter more than the number of decorations around it.\n\nConsider other celebrations and gifting\n\nThe maker's description also suggests using the book for a bridal shower or baby shower. The blank sheets give guests room for messages suited to those events, but check the exact cover wording first. Gold foil lettering is listed, yet the wording itself is not provided by the maker.\n\nAs an engagement gift, it is worth a quick conversation with the couple before buying. They may already have a signing book, or they may have another plan for collecting messages.\n\nIf they do want a photo and message book, ask about their colour choices and photo setup. A gift is more useful when it supports something they want to do, rather than adding another decision to their event planning.\n\nCheck the details when it arrives\n\nOrder well ahead so there is time to look through the book before the celebration. Check the cover, sheets and ribbon, then compare the size with your table plan. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether it is right.\n\nBefore using the book, consider whether its layout and colour suit your event. Change of mind returns require the item to be unused and in its original packaging, so make that decision before testing pens or attaching photos.\n\nOnce you are keeping it, test your chosen supplies in an inconspicuous area. Look for ink showing through or transferring when the sheets touch. Allow the test to dry and check it again before preparing instructions for guests.\n\nCare during and after the event\n\nHandle the book with clean, dry hands and keep it away from damp surfaces. A soft, dry cloth can gently remove surface dust from the cover. Avoid soaking the linen or applying cleaning products without confirmed care guidance.\n\nDuring the event, give ink and any suitable adhesive time to dry before closing the book. This is especially worth watching if several guests are signing in quick succession.\n\nAfterwards, store your wedding keepsake book in a dry place away from direct sunlight. If added photos make the book fuller, do not force it shut. Paper weight and long-term archival properties are not specified, so no particular preservation performance should be assumed.\n\nAllow time for delivery and a final check\n\nDelivery is within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding rather than leaving the full setup until the final week.\n\nBuild in time to inspect the book and arrange any supplies separately. A missing pen or an untested attachment method can affect your plans just as much as choosing the wrong size.\n\nIf the book is not right, change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when it is unused and in its original packaging. You pay return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose this pink wedding guest book if you want blank sheets for pictures and handwritten messages, with a linen cover, gold foil lettering and a bookmark ribbon. Check the 9 x 7 inch size against your plans and remember that 50 sheets is not a stated guest or photo capacity.\n\nArrange photo supplies separately, test them before the day and keep the instructions simple. The aim is to give guests an easy way to leave a few words and a picture you can return to after the celebration.", "llm_summary": "This guest book is intended for instant photos and handwritten messages at weddings and other celebrations. It has a pink linen cover, gold foil lettering and a bookmark ribbon. The listed size is 9 x 7 inches, with 50 blank sheets inside. Guests can contribute wishes, memories and advice, with space planned around their photos. Suggested uses include wedding receptions, bridal showers and baby showers. It is also suggested as a gift for a bride-to-be or newly engaged couple. Brand, weight, paper weight, photo capacity, country of origin and exact cover wording are not specified by the maker. Cameras, film, photos, pens and photo attachments are not listed as included. Check supplies and layout before the event.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/wedding-guest-book-for-instant-photos.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "clear-favour-boxes-30-pack", "sku": "clear-favour-boxes-30-pack", "title": "Clear Favour Boxes, Pack of 30", "slug": "clear-favour-boxes-30-pack", "price": 43.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "wedding-favours", "category_label": "Wedding Favours", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/main-clear-favour-boxes-30-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "A pack of 30 clear plastic boxes with flat-pack storage and pop-and-lock bases makes preparing matching gifts easier.", "description": "When the wrapping should show the gift\n\nChoosing a favour is only part of preparing it for guests. You also need packaging that fits, looks right on the table and can be filled without a last-minute rush. If the gift has a colour or shape you want people to see, opaque wrapping may hide the detail you chose it for.\n\nClear favour boxes offer a different approach. The contents stay visible, while your own ribbon or label can link the gift to the occasion. This pack contains 30 transparent plastic boxes, supplied flat, with two pairs of single-use assembly gloves.\n\nBefore choosing them, think about the whole gift rather than just the main item. Any wrapping, label or insert needs room too. A little checking now is more useful than discovering a tight fit when you start packing.\n\nHow these boxes work\n\nThe boxes arrive flat and need to be formed before use. Each has a reinforced pop-and-lock base. Assemble the base before adding your chosen contents, then check that the box has formed correctly.\n\nFlat pack gift boxes let you keep the packaging unassembled until your packing session. They do add an assembly step, though, so build this into your event preparation. If someone else is helping, make one sample together before dividing the remaining boxes between you.\n\nA thin protective film covers the clear surfaces. Remove it before the finished boxes go on display. The included gloves help reduce handling marks during assembly and filling, but careful handling still matters. Set up a clean working area and keep finished boxes away from the part of the table where you are removing film.\n\nRead both size listings before choosing\n\nThere are two measurement descriptions in the maker's description. The listed size is 7 x 5 x 20 cm. Separate item dimensions are given as 20.8 cm long, 7 cm wide and 5.6 cm high.\n\nThose figures are not identical. Internal measurements are not stated, and there is no confirmed explanation for the difference. Do not treat either set as a promise that an item of the same size will fit inside.\n\nMeasure your gift at its widest points, including any outer wrapper. If you plan to place several items together, arrange them first and measure the group. Allow for the space taken by folds and closures rather than relying only on the outside dimensions.\n\nFor a close fit, seek clarification before ordering. This matters with rectangular favour boxes, where a small difference in height or width can change how the contents sit. A gift that fits lengthways may still be too tall to package as intended.\n\nWho transparent packaging suits\n\nClear wedding favour boxes suit plans where the gift itself is part of the table presentation. A visible item can carry the colour scheme without needing printed packaging. You can then keep the outside simple or add a small tag.\n\nWeddings are not the only listed use. These boxes are also intended for bridal showers, birthdays and seasonal celebrations. The same plain packaging can be styled differently with separately sourced decorations.\n\nFor individual gifts, remember that transparency removes the surprise of hidden wrapping. That may be exactly what you want for a display, but less useful if you want the recipient to unwrap something unseen. Choose transparent gift packaging because visibility serves your plan, not simply because it looks tidy in a product photograph.\n\nPlanning edible gifts with care\n\nThe maker suggests several edible contents, including macarons, chocolate-covered strawberries and truffles. These are ideas for use, not a fixed capacity. Treat sizes vary, and any cups, wrappers or food-safe inserts take up space.\n\nIf you are comparing macaron gift boxes, measure the actual macarons you intend to use. Do not rely on a suggested number fitting every batch. The same applies to truffle gift packaging, especially when each piece has its own cup or wrapper.\n\nFood-contact certification is not specified by the maker. Do not assume that unwrapped food can rest directly against the plastic. Use suitable separate food packaging and check the requirements of your chosen treats.\n\nThe boxes also have no stated temperature range or leak-resistance rating. They should not replace the storage or transport arrangements your food needs. Ask your food maker about those needs before settling on clear dessert boxes for the event.\n\nChoosing non-food contents\n\nSmall collectibles, cosmetics and perfumes are among the suggested non-food uses. Start with the complete item as it will be packed, including any original container. A bottle cap or outer carton can add more height than expected.\n\nWeight needs a separate check. The base is described as reinforced, but no load limit is provided. That description is not a guarantee that a particular glass bottle or other heavy item can be carried safely.\n\nTry one arrangement before preparing the full set. Look at how the item rests and whether it presses against the sides or closure. If the fit seems forced, choose different packaging rather than counting on the plastic to make room.\n\nFor gift boxes for collectibles, visibility may be useful, but protective qualities are not specified. Valuable or fragile items may need packaging beyond a clear presentation box.\n\nWork out your quantity and table space\n\nEach pack contains 30 boxes. If you need 60 individual favours, that means two packs. If you need 75, three packs provide 90 boxes. Decide whether you are giving one favour to each guest, one per household or another quantity before calculating your order.\n\nInclude any boxes you want for testing. A sample helps you settle the contents and decoration before repeating the same steps across the whole batch.\n\nThink about placement as well as quantity. Compare the listed measurements with the room available beside each place setting or on a shared favour table. Make a paper outline if that helps you judge the footprint. Do not assume a box will fit neatly between plates and glasses without checking your actual layout.\n\nAdd decoration without hiding the contents\n\nThe clear, unadorned surface can be finished with your own ribbons, stickers or tags. These accessories are not included, and no personalisation service is supplied.\n\nStart with one decoration and see whether it does enough. A ribbon might add the colour you need, while a tag carries a name or short message. Covering every side can defeat the reason for choosing transparent boxes.\n\nFor DIY favour packaging, make a finished sample before buying all the extras. Check where a sticker sits and whether a ribbon interferes with opening the box. Keep the sample nearby while packing so that anyone helping can follow the same arrangement.\n\nYou do not need every box to be decorated heavily. Consistent placement can make a set look coordinated while leaving the gifts visible.\n\nSet up a practical packing session\n\nGather the boxes, contents and any decorations before you begin. Use a clean, dry surface with enough room to separate unassembled boxes from completed favours.\n\nForm one box first. Remove its protective film, check the base and test your planned contents. This first trial is the time to change an awkward arrangement, not after all 30 boxes have been filled.\n\nThe pack includes two pairs of single-use assembly gloves. Use them to help limit fingerprints, and keep anything that could mark the clear surfaces away from your working area.\n\nOnce the sample is settled, work in manageable batches. Some people prefer to assemble several boxes before filling them; others finish each one in turn. Choose the method that lets you check each base and handle the gifts carefully.\n\nCare, storage and delivery planning\n\nKeep unused boxes clean and dry in their original packaging. Leave them flat until needed and avoid piling heavy objects on top. For exterior marks, use a soft cloth gently rather than an abrasive cleaner.\n\nDishwasher suitability and washing instructions are not specified. Reuse performance is also unstated, so inspect any used box before considering it for another gift. Damage or soiling may make it unsuitable.\n\nDelivery is Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of the wedding date so you have time to check the pack and prepare your favours.\n\nChange of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nThese clear party boxes provide 30 matching containers, flat-pack storage and pop-and-lock bases. Protective film and two pairs of assembly gloves are included.\n\nChoose them when visible contents suit your gifting plan. Check both listed measurements, confirm any close fit and take care with food packaging requirements. Then make one complete sample before filling the rest. That small trial gives you a useful check on the size, arrangement and finishing details before event day.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 30 transparent plastic favour boxes for weddings, bridal showers, birthdays and seasonal gifting. The boxes arrive flat and have reinforced pop-and-lock bases. Thin protective film and two pairs of single-use assembly gloves are included. The maker lists a size of 7 x 5 x 20 cm and separate item dimensions of 20.8 x 7 x 5.6 cm. Internal dimensions, product weight, load limit and country of origin are not specified by the maker. The clear surface can be decorated with separately supplied ribbons, stickers or tags. Food-contact certification is not specified. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within two working days followed by up to seven working days by tracked courier.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/clear-favour-boxes-30-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack", "sku": "gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack", "title": "Gold Favour Boxes with Lids, 50 Pack", "slug": "gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack", "price": 43.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "wedding-favours", "category_label": "Wedding Favours", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/main-gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "This pack includes 50 lidded boxes, 50 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon to help you finish small gifts in one matching style.", "description": "Start with the gift, not just the box\n\nSmall guest gifts can take more planning than expected. You might have chosen the sweets or keepsake, but still need packaging that fits, room for a message and enough matching pieces for everyone. Buying those parts separately also means keeping track of several quantities.\n\nThis pack brings together 50 gold favour boxes with lids, 50 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon. It gives you a starting point for presenting wedding table gifts, with the contents left for you to choose.\n\nThe most useful first step is to measure your intended gift. A box can suit your table colours and still be the wrong size for what goes inside. Check the contents, the guest count and your preparation time before deciding how many packs to order.\n\nWhat comes in the pack\n\nThere are 50 cardboard boxes in a gold colour, each with a lid. The listed size is 3 x 3 x 3 inches, also given as 7.6 x 7.6 x 7.6 cm. Their cube shape gives you equal listed length, width and height.\n\nThe pack also contains 50 blank gift tags. If you use one per box, each gift can have its own name or short note. No printing or engraving service is listed, so any writing is something you arrange yourself.\n\nThe supplied ribbon totals 216 ft. Its width, material and colour are not specified by the maker. If those details matter to your table design, check before making plans that depend on a particular ribbon look.\n\nFood, candles and other gift contents are not included. Think of this as a set of packaging pieces, rather than a ready-filled favour.\n\nCheck the size with the whole gift in mind\n\nThe listed box measurements are a useful starting point, but usable internal dimensions are not stated. That matters when your gift is close to the box size. A snug fit on paper may leave too little space for wrapping or for the lid to close.\n\nMeasure the gift at its widest and tallest points. Include any sleeve, bag, protective wrap or other packaging you plan to keep around it. A handle, a raised decoration or a twist at the top of a sweet bag can change the space needed.\n\nFor cube gift boxes, check all directions rather than judging by height alone. A short item can still be too wide. Do not assume that a mug, glass or candle will fit just because it is described as small.\n\nOnce the boxes arrive, try one complete sample before filling the rest. Include the gift, its wrapping, the lid, tag and ribbon. This gives you a much clearer idea of the finished result.\n\nChoosing contents for small gift boxes\n\nThese boxes are listed for small gifts and party favours. Wrapped sweets, chocolates, soaps and other compact presents are possible choices, provided their measurements and packaging work with the box.\n\nFor favour boxes for sweets, keep food safety separate from appearance. Direct food-contact suitability is not specified. Use appropriate food-safe wrapping or a liner rather than assuming loose food can sit against the cardboard.\n\nChocolate favour boxes also need sensible storage. The packaging does not remove the need to follow the food maker's storage advice. Plan where filled boxes will wait before the event, especially if the contents need particular conditions.\n\nIf you are considering small candle gift boxes, check both fit and weight. No load limit is stated. The same caution applies to glass items or other heavy gifts, which may also need protection beyond a presentation box.\n\nWork out how many boxes you need\n\nBegin by deciding who receives a favour. One per guest gives a different total from one per couple or household. Make that decision before calculating packs, particularly if your seating list is still changing.\n\nEach pack provides 50 boxes. For example, 80 individual gifts require two packs, while 120 require three. Those figures refer to box quantities only, not to how much of your chosen filling you will need.\n\nCount tags at the same time. The pack has one blank tag for each box, so there are no extra tags listed for practice or replacement. Take care when writing names and check spelling before starting.\n\nIt can help to keep a simple record of completed gifts. Marking off names or table groups as you pack is easier than opening finished boxes later to find out which ones are ready.\n\nThink about the table layout\n\nGold wedding favour boxes can be part of a matching gift presentation, but their footprint still needs a place in your table plan. Compare the listed 7.6 x 7.6 cm base with the space available at each setting.\n\nTry a paper square of that size on your planned layout. Leave room for plates, glasses, cutlery and any other pieces you intend to use. This is a planning check, not a promise that the boxes will suit every table arrangement.\n\nAlso think about how guests will find their gifts. A handwritten name on a tag may help identify an individual favour. If you intend the boxes to serve another purpose, such as marking places, test whether the writing is clear enough in your layout.\n\nThe exact gold shade and surface finish are not specified. Avoid planning a precise colour match from the word gold alone.\n\nMake the tags and ribbon work for your plan\n\nBlank tags give you room for a name, a thank-you or a brief note. Keep the message short enough to read easily. Tag dimensions are not listed, so wait until you can check the writing space before committing to a long message.\n\nTest your pen on one tag first. This lets you check the lettering and how much room your chosen wording takes. It is easier to adjust a sample than to rewrite a whole batch.\n\nFor ribbon gift packaging, finish one box before cutting ribbon for all 50. Your knot or bow style affects how much you use. Divide the supplied length according to the result you want, rather than assuming every wrapping style will use the same amount.\n\nLeave yourself time for this finishing stage. Writing names and tying ribbon are small jobs individually, but they add up across a full guest list.\n\nPrepare one sample, then work in batches\n\nThe maker does not state whether assembly is required or how the boxes arrive. Open the pack early enough to check the pieces and understand what preparation is needed.\n\nMake one complete favour and look at it from a practical point of view. Does the lid close without pressure? Is the gift easy to remove? Can the tag be read without undoing the whole presentation?\n\nOnce you are happy with the sample, work through the remaining boxes in manageable batches. You might prepare the boxes first, add wrapped contents next and finish with tags and ribbon.\n\nKeep your work surface clean and dry. If different guests are receiving different contents, separate those groups clearly before packing. A little organisation at this stage can save repeated checking later.\n\nUse beyond the wedding table\n\nThe maker's description also includes bridal showers and baby showers as uses. The same size checks apply to bridal shower favour boxes and baby shower favour boxes as they do to wedding gifts.\n\nStart with the item you want to give, then decide whether the box supports that plan. A small wrapped soap and a collection of sweets may need very different amounts of room despite both being called favours.\n\nThese small gift boxes with lids can also be considered for other party gifts or compact presents. They are presentation packaging, though, and postal protection is not specified. If you plan to send a gift, choose suitable outer packaging and cushioning separately.\n\nKeep the packaging dry and plan delivery early\n\nCardboard favour boxes should be kept in a clean, dry place. Avoid spills, damp storage and washing. Keep unused pieces in their original packaging until you are ready to work with them.\n\nDelivery is available within Australia only. We dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Order well ahead of your wedding date so you have time to inspect and prepare everything.\n\nCheck the pack before filling or writing on the pieces. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery when the item is unused and in its original packaging. The customer pays return postage.\n\nFaulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law. Keep your order details available if you need to contact us about a problem.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis pack supplies 50 gold cardboard boxes with lids, 50 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon. Each box is listed as 3 x 3 x 3 inches, or 7.6 x 7.6 x 7.6 cm.\n\nChoose your contents first, check the full wrapped size and make one sample before preparing the batch. Allow time for delivery, writing and packing. Those checks will help you decide whether this gold gift packaging suits the guest gifts you have in mind.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 50 gold cardboard favour boxes with lids, 50 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon. The cube-shaped boxes are listed as 3 x 3 x 3 inches, or 7.6 x 7.6 x 7.6 cm. They are intended for small gift presentation at weddings, bridal showers, baby showers and parties. Gift contents are not included. Internal dimensions, weight limits, ribbon width, tag dimensions and food-contact suitability are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only by tracked courier, with dispatch within 2 working days and delivery then taking up to 7 working days. Change of mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery for unused items in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-favour-boxes-with-lids-50-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack", "sku": "gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack", "title": "Gold Gift Boxes with Lids, Pack of 30", "slug": "gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack", "price": 66.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "wedding-favours", "category_label": "Wedding Favours", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/main-gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack-4.jpg" ], "description_short": "Pack 30 small gifts in matching lidded boxes, with blank tags and ribbon included for the finishing touches.", "description": "Bring a group of small gifts together\n\nChoosing the gifts is only part of preparing wedding favours or wedding party presents. You also need packaging that makes them look like a set, gives you somewhere to add a name and fits the space available. Buying those pieces separately can mean more decisions just when your event list is getting longer.\n\nThis Gold Gift Boxes with Lids 30 Pack brings the main packaging pieces together. You receive 30 boxes, 30 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon. Each box is listed as 5 x 5 x 5 inches, or 12.7 x 12.7 x 12.7 cm.\n\nThe important question is whether that size works for your gifts. Start with the contents, then consider the table layout, packing time and delivery window. A little checking before you order is more useful than finding out on packing day that a handle or bottle cap will not fit.\n\nWhat this pack gives you\n\nThese are gold paper gift boxes with lids, intended for small presents. The product details describe the material as cardboard, while the maker description refers to kraft paper. Board thickness and coating details are not stated.\n\nThe included blank tags give you a place to write guest names, a short thank-you or a message to a member of your wedding party. There is one tag per box if you share them equally. The ribbon comes as a total listed length of 216 ft, rather than a stated length for each finished gift.\n\nDo not count on any items beyond those listed. Candles, food, mugs, jewellery and other gifts are not included. Nor is there a printing or personalisation service. You choose the contents and add your own written details.\n\nCheck the size before choosing the contents\n\nThe listed measurements describe a cube-shaped box. That can be a useful starting point for small gift planning, but it does not establish how much usable room is inside. The maker does not say whether the measurements are internal or external.\n\nMeasure your chosen item at its widest and tallest points. For a mug, include the handle. For a bottle, include its cap. If you plan to wrap the gift or add cushioning, measure the finished package rather than the bare item.\n\nA simple paper outline can help you picture the footprint, though it cannot confirm internal fit. If your gift is close to the listed dimensions, ask for more information before ordering. Avoid planning around an exact fit when the internal clearance is unknown.\n\nWeight also matters. No load limit is stated, so size alone is not enough to judge whether a heavy object is suitable.\n\nChoose wedding favours around your table plan\n\nGold wedding favour boxes can give each place setting a matching package. Before choosing that arrangement, compare the listed 12.7 cm footprint with the space available around plates, glasses and place cards.\n\nA table that looks roomy when empty may feel crowded once the meal service is set up. Check your venue plan rather than assuming every guest setting has spare space. If you want to use a separate favour table, measure that area too.\n\nThink about how guests will identify and collect their gifts. A name written on each tag may help when the contents differ. If every gift is the same, a short message may be enough.\n\nThe box colour provides a starting point for your styling, but the exact gold shade and surface finish are not specified. If a close colour match matters, seek further detail before buying other decorations to match.\n\nPlan bridesmaid and groomsmen gifts by item\n\nBridesmaid proposal boxes are often chosen before all the gifts have been bought. It is better to reverse that order. Decide what you want to give, measure it and then check the packaging.\n\nThe maker suggests small items such as jewellery, makeup, soaps and perfumes. Their actual sizes vary, so these examples are not promises of fit. Several small gifts together may also need more space than you expect once each one is wrapped.\n\nThe same approach applies to groomsmen proposal boxes. Check every item, especially anything with a handle, an unusual shape or a heavy base. There is no stated load limit for this pack.\n\nFor a mixed wedding party, you can keep the outside packaging consistent while choosing different contents. Use the blank tags to keep track of who receives each gift, rather than relying on memory during a busy packing session.\n\nUse the tags and ribbon thoughtfully\n\nGift boxes with ribbon let you plan the finish without sourcing every part separately. Even so, your ribbon use will depend on the style of tie you choose and how much length you leave at the ends.\n\nFinish one trial box before cutting ribbon for the whole pack. Measure what you use, then check that your plan works with the total supplied length. Ribbon width and material are not specified, so leave detailed styling decisions until you have inspected it.\n\nWrite a sample tag as well. Check that your message fits and that the ink is dry before placing it against another surface. Keeping names short and clear can be more useful than trying to fit a long note onto each tag.\n\nAny extra decorations are your own additions. If you plan to use adhesive, test it on one box first because the coating and adhesive compatibility are not stated.\n\nTake extra care with edible gifts\n\nSweets, chocolates, cookies and cupcakes are among the suggested contents. That does not mean direct food-contact suitability has been confirmed. Use separate food-safe packaging for edible gifts rather than putting unwrapped food directly against the cardboard.\n\nCheck the size after adding that packaging. A wrapped biscuit bundle or a protected cupcake may take up more room than the food alone. Decorations on top of a cupcake can also change the height you need.\n\nFood storage needs should guide your plan. These are gift boxes, not temperature-controlled containers. Follow the storage instructions for the food itself and decide when it should be packed.\n\nThe same care helps with non-food gifts that could leave marks. Separately wrapping a soap or bath bomb can help keep the presentation tidy. Make sure any added wrapping still allows the lid to sit as intended.\n\nCount gifts, not just guests\n\nA pack contains 30 boxes. Your required number depends on whether you are giving one favour per person, one per couple or a smaller set of wedding party gifts.\n\nMake a written count before ordering. Include gifts for anyone outside the main guest list if that is part of your plan. You may also want a box for checking the fit and practising the ribbon tie.\n\nKeep the pack count separate from the number of gift items. Several small presents might go into one box, while a larger gift might need different packaging altogether.\n\nIf you are comparing small gift boxes with lids, compare the full contents of each option. Here, the tags and ribbon are included. Protective filling, food-safe wrapping and outer transport packaging are not listed as part of the pack.\n\nLeave time for checking and packing\n\nWe dispatch within 2 working days, and delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier, Australia only. Order well ahead of the wedding date so you have time to inspect the contents and prepare the gifts.\n\nAssembly requirements are not specified. Do not build your schedule around an assumption that every box will arrive ready to fill. Check the supplied pieces when they arrive and allow a separate session for preparation.\n\nStart by completing one box from beginning to end. Confirm the gift fit, close the lid, add the ribbon and write the tag. That trial helps you spot practical issues before repeating the same steps across the whole order.\n\nIf other people are helping, keep a finished example nearby. It gives everyone a clear guide without needing to explain the layout again for each box.\n\nKeep the packaging dry and protected\n\nCardboard packaging needs sensible storage. Keep unused boxes away from moisture and place them somewhere they will not be crushed by other event supplies.\n\nHandle them with clean, dry hands. If dust settles on the surface, remove it gently with a soft, dry cloth. Washing or soaking is not suitable care for cardboard gift packaging.\n\nFor transport, use a suitable outer container and check that the gifts cannot shift freely. These boxes are not described as rated postal shipping cartons, so do not treat them as a substitute for protective shipping packaging.\n\nWeather resistance is not specified either. For outdoor events, arrange a dry, protected location and check the venue plan rather than relying on the boxes to cope with damp conditions.\n\nThe short version\n\nThis pack offers 30 gold gift boxes with lids, 30 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon for coordinated small gifts. The listed box size is 12.7 x 12.7 x 12.7 cm.\n\nMeasure your wrapped contents, check your table space and leave time for a trial box. Internal dimensions, load limits and assembly requirements are not stated.\n\nIf the unused item is not right, change-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.", "llm_summary": "This pack contains 30 gold gift boxes with lids, 30 blank tags and 216 ft of ribbon. Each box is listed as 5 x 5 x 5 inches, or 12.7 x 12.7 x 12.7 cm. The product details identify the material as cardboard, and the maker description refers to kraft paper. Suggested uses include wedding favours, bridesmaid proposals, groomsmen proposals and birthday gift packaging. Gift contents are not included. Internal dimensions, box weight, load limit, board thickness and country of origin are not specified by the maker. Delivery is Australia only, with dispatch within 2 working days followed by up to 7 working days by tracked courier. Unused change-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/gold-gift-boxes-with-lids-30-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" }, { "id": "white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack", "sku": "white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack", "title": "White Organza Favour Bags, Pack of 100", "slug": "white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack", "price": 25.99, "currency": "AUD", "availability": "in_stock", "category": "wedding-favours", "category_label": "Wedding Favours", "tags": [], "colors": [], "materials": [], "dimensions": null, "weight": null, "images": [ "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/main-white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack-2.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack-3.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack-4.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack-5.jpg", "https://mywedding.net.au/dropship-images/wedding-favours/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack-6.jpg" ], "description_short": "This pack of 100 sheer organza bags has matching satin drawstrings for easy filling and closing.", "description": "Small gifts still need a wrapping plan\n\nChoosing a favour is only part of the job. You also need a way to present it, keep the wrapping consistent and prepare enough for everyone. When you are working through a long guest list, a small pouch can be a useful alternative to folding and taping individual pieces of wrapping paper.\n\nThese white organza favour bags come in a pack of 100. Each has a matching satin drawstring ribbon, so the closing method is already part of the bag. The organza is sheer, allowing the gift inside to remain visible.\n\nThe main question is fit. A bag that looks right in a photograph may not suit the shape of your chosen gift. Start with the measurements, then think about the look you want and how you will prepare the full batch.\n\nHow the drawstring design works\n\nTo fill one of these drawstring favour bags, open the top and place the gift inside. Pull the drawstrings to gather the opening above it. To take the gift out, loosen the gathered top again.\n\nThis gives you a closure without needing separate wrapping tape. It also means you can open a bag to check the contents before setting it out. Leave space above the gift so the fabric can gather rather than pulling tightly across the top.\n\nThe drawstring is a closure, not a stated carrying handle. No load limit is provided for the bag or ribbon. If your gift is heavy, do not assume that a pouch of the right size will also be suitable for its weight.\n\nUnderstand the listed measurements\n\nEach bag is described as approximately 10 x 15 cm, or 4 x 6 inches. The product details also list item dimensions of 15.2 x 10.2 x 0.5 cm. These are the supplied measurements, not a promise of usable internal capacity.\n\nA flat pouch needs room to expand around an object. A box with depth takes up more fabric than a flat card of the same width. The drawstring area also needs space to close above the contents.\n\nMeasure the gift with any inner wrapping already in place. Check its width and length, but do not stop there. Its depth, corners and shape matter too. If the fit looks close on paper, do not count on being able to force it into the bag.\n\nFor small wedding gift bags, some spare room is more useful than a tight fit. You want to insert and remove the gift without catching the fabric or straining the opening.\n\nDecide whether a sheer finish suits your gift\n\nSheer gift bags make the contents part of the presentation. This can suit a favour you want guests to see straight away. It can also help you check which bags have been filled as you work.\n\nThe same feature matters if you want a surprise. Organza does not hide the contents like an opaque wrapper. If concealment is important, consider whether your gift needs separate inner packaging or a different wrapping choice.\n\nWhite provides one shared colour across the batch, even when the gifts inside differ. Still, the colour of the contents will show through. Look at the whole filled pouch, rather than choosing on the empty bag alone.\n\nIf you are comparing matching favour bags for a table display, set a sample beside your actual place setting. That gives you a clearer view of the size and finish than looking at each item separately.\n\nChoose contents with care\n\nThese bags are intended for small gifts, with jewellery and party gifting among the uses described. That does not establish that every small item will be suitable. Check both the dimensions and the needs of the gift itself.\n\nFor example, organza jewellery bags should not be treated as protective storage without further information. No anti-tarnish, scratch-protection or impact-protection properties are stated. An item that needs a box or other protective layer should keep that protection.\n\nFood needs separate thought. No food-contact suitability is specified for these bags. If you plan to give edible favours, use suitable food-safe packaging around the food rather than placing it directly against the organza.\n\nThe pack contains bags only. Sweets, flowers and other gifts are not included. Account for those separately when working out the full cost and preparation time for your favours.\n\nWork out your bag count\n\nA 100 pack of favour bags can cover up to 100 individual gifts when you use one pouch for each. Your guest total is a starting point, but the right number depends on how you plan to hand out the favours.\n\nYou might give one gift to each person or one to each household. You may also have gifts for people who are helping with the event. Write down the actual number of wrapped gifts you need before deciding how many packs to order.\n\nThink about your preparation plan as well. If you intend to make a trial favour, include it in your count. Any extra bags needed for changes should be part of your own plan, rather than an assumed allowance within the pack.\n\nBulk favour bags are easiest to organise when the bag count and gift count are checked together. This avoids discovering a shortfall after most of the work is done.\n\nTry one complete favour before filling the rest\n\nStart with a single bag and the exact gift you intend to use. Include any inner packaging you need. Fill the pouch, close the drawstring and check whether the gift sits comfortably without stretching the fabric.\n\nThen open it again. A favour should be practical for the recipient to remove, not just possible to squeeze inside. Look for corners or edges that might catch when the gift comes out.\n\nPlace the finished sample where you expect to display it. For wedding table favours, check it beside the plate, glassware and place card. The aim is to judge the whole setting, not to assume suitability for a particular venue.\n\nOnce you are happy with the sample, prepare the remaining bags in manageable batches. Count each group as you finish it. A simple written tally can save you from recounting every pouch later.\n\nKeep extra decoration separate from the purchase\n\nThe matching satin drawstring ribbon is already part of each bag. You do not need to buy another ribbon just to use the stated closure. Whether you add anything else depends on your own presentation plan.\n\nNo personalisation service is included. If you want to use your own tags or labels, test them with a filled pouch before preparing the full set. Check that they do not block the opening or make the favour awkward to unpack.\n\nFor wedding thank-you bags, it can help to settle the contents and fit before choosing extra decoration. That keeps you from building a wrapping plan around a gift that does not fit.\n\nThese pouches can also be considered for birthday favour bags or other small presents. The same checks apply, whatever the occasion. Start with the object, then choose the wrapping around it.\n\nStore and handle the bags sensibly\n\nKeep unused bags in a clean, dry place. Avoid spills and keep them away from sharp objects that could catch the fabric. When filling, guide the gift through the opening rather than pushing it against the sides.\n\nDo not overfill the pouch. The top needs room to gather, and the gift should be removable without a struggle. Open the drawstrings before taking contents out instead of pulling an object through a partly closed opening.\n\nNo washing instructions are specified in the maker's description. Check care guidance before laundering, and do not assume machine washing is suitable. Keep the original packaging while you decide whether the bags meet your needs.\n\nIf a change-of-mind return may be needed, keep the item unused and in its original packaging. Test your plan carefully before starting work on the whole pack.\n\nAllow time before the event\n\nWe dispatch within 2 working days. Delivery then takes up to 7 working days by tracked courier, within Australia only. Order well ahead of the wedding date rather than leaving the wrapping stage until the final week.\n\nAllow time to receive the bags, inspect them and check your gift fit. You will also need time to fill and count the finished favours. These tasks are easier to manage before the last few days of event preparation.\n\nChange-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery for unused items in their original packaging. Return postage is paid by the customer. Faulty or damaged items are put right under the Australian Consumer Law.\n\nThe short version\n\nChoose these white organza bags when you want sheer wrapping with a matching drawstring for small gifts. The pack contains 100 bags, each approximately 10 x 15 cm.\n\nCheck the complete gift against the measurements, leave room for the closure and use separate protective or food-safe packaging where needed. Try one finished favour before filling the rest, and order well ahead of your event.", "llm_summary": "This product is a pack of 100 white organza favour bags with matching satin drawstring ribbons. The fabric is sheer. Each bag is described as approximately 10 x 15 cm, or 4 x 6 inches, and the listed item dimensions are 15.2 x 10.2 x 0.5 cm. The bags are intended for small gifts, including wedding and party favours that fit within the pouch. Only the bags are included. Usable internal dimensions, weight, load limit, country of origin and food-contact suitability are not specified by the maker. Dispatch is within 2 working days, followed by delivery taking up to 7 working days by tracked courier within Australia. Unused change-of-mind returns are accepted within 14 days of delivery in original packaging, with return postage paid by the customer.", "returnable": true, "return_policy": "Voluntary 14-day change-of-mind returns in original condition, buyer pays return postage; Australian Consumer Law consumer guarantees for faulty goods. Return postage on faulty goods is ours.", "shipping_profile": "standard", "warranty": null, "brand": "My Wedding Company", "gtin": null, "mpn": null, "condition": "new", "url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/", "canonical_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack/", "json_url": "https://mywedding.net.au/api/products/white-organza-favour-bags-100-pack.json", "updated_at": "2026-11-12" } ] }